Home
        2004 Pontiac GTO Owner Manual
         Contents
1.                0  1 49  Where Are the Air Bags                ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 48  Air Cleaner Filter  Engine  Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module  SDM   Altering Overspeed Presets  Antenna  Backglass  Anti lock Brake System  ABS   Anti Lock Brake  System Warning Light    Care of Safety Belts             ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 81  Chemical Paint Spotting              eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 5 84  Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle                  5 79  Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle                5 82  FINISH  DAMAGE  22222 22 Selle onen UN hken 5 84  Sheet Metal Damage 1    W W u  sssseeeeeeee erne ennen 5 84  Underbody Maintenance    s    5 84  Vehicle Care Appearance Materials                  5 85  Wealthersitips  acirc nicesine insi eaaa 5 81  Arming the System sreiiissriaireninnssiieisii eiaa 2 14  ARRIVAL DEFAULT           2  02 00 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 34  ASAA E E E 3 18  Ashtrays eiiean aona o aaraa 3 18  AUDIO DISTORTION LIMITER ossee 2 35  Audio  System  SJ urenheder aa 3 42  Audio Steering Wheel Controls                   3 53  Backglass Antenna             ccceeeeeeeeee eee ee een eee es 3 55  Care of Your CD Player            ceeeseeeeeeeeee tees 3 54  Care of Your CDSs nionee reati 3 54  Radio with Six Disc CD             cceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 43  Setting the Time            cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een rene 3 42  Theft Deterrent Feature a c 3 52  Understanding Radio Reception                  05 3 54  AUTO HEADLIGHTS SENSITIVITY              00
2.               065 7 2  Online Owner Center                cccceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 7 3    Customer Assistance for Text  Telephone  TTY  Users                 cceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4  Customer Assistance Offices  GM Mobility Program for Persons  with Disabilities  Roadside Assistance Program    Customer Assistance and Information    Courtesy Transportation seere  Vehicle Data Collection and Event  Data Recorders    Reporting Safety Defects  Reporting Safety Defects to the United  States Government  Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors  Service Publications Ordering Information       Customer Assistance and  Information    Customer Satisfaction Procedure    Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to   your dealer and to Pontiac  Normally  any concerns with  the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle  will be resolved by your dealer   s sales or service  departments  Sometimes  however  despite the best  intentions of all concerned  misunderstandings can  occur  If your concern has not been resolved to your  satisfaction  the following steps should be taken     STEP ONE  Discuss your concern with a member of  dealership management  Normally  concerns can   be quickly resolved at that level  If the matter has  already been reviewed with the sales  service or parts  manager  contact the owner of the dealership or   the general manager     STEP TWO  If after contacting a member of dealership  management  it appears your concern cannot be  resolved by the dealersh
3.             068 4 24  4 35  2 8  2 27   Care of  Safety Belts  vassietcc an ddsosnctncectashcetdeetansntaetaole  5 81  Your GD Player surrender 3 54  YOUN CD SEE aE rA Aa E AnA 3 54   CD Messages            cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeneeeeeaes 3 49   Center Console Storage Area              cceeeeeeeeee ee 2 31   GAINS  TNES 2 eee ne ars ae rer E 5 69   Charging System Light siie edanendeeer 3 27    Check  Engine Lighi zisirei  Check Engine Light 32 roere renses  Checking Coolant                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee  Checking Engine Oil                 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens  Checking Things Under the Hood                    05   Chemical Paint Spotting                cceeeeeeeeeeeee teens  Child Restraints  Child Restraint Systems  Infants and Young Children ss cc  Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for  Children  LATCH System              eeeeeeeeeeeeee  Older Children   ic2cc csccesscsvvenss ora ere  Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the  LATCH System  Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat  Position  Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front  Seat POSION sacdan nEn en EES  TOP Stia Dacian erien a a R  Top Strap Anchor Location                eeeeeeeeee ees  Where to Put the Restraint  Cigarette Lighter                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee  Cleaning  Inside of Your Vehicle  Outside of Your Vehicle                 cseeeeeeeee eee ee  Underbody Maintenance  WeatherstripS  2633 brad era ebdre pr    Cleaning Aluminum Wheels                0ecee
4.       W W W     sseeeeeeeererereee 6 10  Your Vehicle and the Environment                      6 2 At Least Once a Year issilereniciisirssniininr sen 6 10  Using Your Maintenance Schedule                      6 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants                 6 13  Scheduled Maintenance              c eseeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts            6 15  Additional Required Services                ceeeeeeee ee 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing                eee 6 16  Maintenance Footnotes             ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eters 6 8 Maintenance Record              eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17    6 1    Maintenance Schedule    Introduction    Important  Keep engine oil at the proper level and  change as recommended     Protection    Plan    Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan  The Plan  supplements your new vehicle warranties  See your  Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer  for details        Maintenance Requirements    Notice  Maintenance intervals  checks  inspections   replacement parts and recommended fluids and  lubricants as prescribed in this manual are  necessary to keep your vehicle in good working  condition  Any damage caused by failure to follow  scheduled maintenance may not be covered by  warranty     Your Vehicle and the Environment    Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  vehicle in good working condition  but also helps the  environment  All recommended maintenance is  important  Improper vehicle maint
5.      If the weather is below freezing  32  F or 0  C   let  the engine run for a few minutes to warm up     Notice  Your engine is designed to work with the  electronics in your vehicle  If you add electrical  parts or accessories  you could change the way the  engine operates  Before adding electrical equipment   check with your dealer  If you do not  your engine  might not perform properly     2 17    Racing or Other Competitive Driving    See your warranty book before using your vehicle  for racing or other competitive driving     Notice  If you use your vehicle for racing or other  competitive driving  the engine may use more   oil than it would with normal use  Low oil levels can  damage the engine  Be sure to check the oil level  often during racing or other competitive driving and  keep the level at or near 1 quart  1 L  above the  upper mark that shows the proper operating range  on the engine oil dipstick  For information on   how to add oil  see Engine Oil on page 5 13  After  the competitive driving  remove excess oil so   that the level on the dipstick is not above the upper  mark that shows the proper operating range     Automatic Transmission Operation  There are several different positions for your shift    lever  Push in the button on top of the shift lever when  shifting into position     2 18    PARK  P   The engine can be started in this position   This position prevents the rear wheels from turning   and so should be selected  together with the parking  br
6.      ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 34  Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors ccecce 2 12  Loading Your Vehicle                  e esceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 30  Locks  DOOF verehen e r aowheda tine a S 2 6  Leaving Your Vehicle                cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7  LOSS Of GOMtiOl wihcncdaciettewenstseteouelelesneuiekouwenecs 4 13  Lumbar  Manual Controls cesadh iiiaae aens 1 2    Maintenance Schedule    Additional Required Services                ceeeeeeeeeee 6 6  At Each Fuel Fill                c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 6 9  At Least Once a Month                 ccccceeeeeeeee es 6 10  At Least Once a Year           ccc cece ee eeeee ease ee enes 6 10  Introduction sertie aa aa E 6 2  Maintenance Footnotes              ccccceeeseeeeeeeeaees 6 8  Maintenance Record               ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17  Maintenance Requirements                   eeeeeeee ees 6 2  Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts           6 15  Owner Checks and Services             c0ceceeeeeeeees 6 9  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants               6 13  Scheduled Maintenance                 ccceeeeeenea seen 6 4  Using MO US rr hr ere Aase EEN 6 3  Your Vehicle and the Environment                     6 2  Malfunction Indicator Light seeen 3 29  Manual Lumbar Controls                 cccccceceeeeeeeeeees 1 2  Manual Transmission                cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 17  PWG E E E E E E A 5 23  Operation          cc ceeee cece scence nese eee eeaeeaeeaeeaeeaes 2 21    Mexico  Central America and Caribbe
7.     A  The belt is twisted across the body     1 18       You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt     In a crash  you wouldn t have the full width of  the belt to spread impact forces  If a belt is  twisted  make it straight so it can work  properly  or ask your dealer to fix it           To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle   The belt should go back out of the way     Before you close the door  be sure the belt is out of the  way  If you slam the door on it  you can damage  both the belt and your vehicle     Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy    Safety belts work for everyone  including pregnant  women  Like all occupants  they are more likely to be  seriously injured if they don   t wear safety belts        A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt  and  the lap portion should be worn as low as possible   below the rounding  throughout the pregnancy     The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  mother  When a safety belt is worn properly  it s more  likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash  For  pregnant women  as for anyone  the key to making  safety belts effective is wearing them properly     Right Front Passenger Position    To learn how to wear the right front passenger   s safety  belt properly  see Driver Position on page 1 12     The right front passenger s safety belt works the same  way as the driver   s safety belt     except for one thing    If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the  way  you wi
8.     Erasing Speed Memory    When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition  your  cruise control set speed memory is erased     3 11    Exterior Lamps    The dial to the left of the  steering wheel on the  instrument panel controls  the following positions        200   Parking Lamps   Turn the dial to this position to  turn on the parking lamps  together with the taillamps   sidemarker lamps  license plate lamps  and instrument  panel lights     ZD  Headlamps   Turn the dial to this position to turn  on the headlamps  together with the parking lamps   taillamps  sidemarker lamps  and license plate lamps     3 12    AUTO  Automatic Headlamps   Turn the dial to AUTO  to provide for automatic operation of the headlamps   taillamps  sidemarker lamps  and parking lamps    For more information see    Automatic Headlamp System     following     O  Off   Turn the switch to this position to turn all  lamps off     Daytime Running Lamps  DRL     Daytime Running Lamps  DRL  can make it easier for  others to see the front of your vehicle during the   day  DRL can be helpful in many different driving  conditions  but they can be especially helpful in the short  periods after dawn and before sunset     The DRL system will make your low beam headlamps  come on at a reduced brightness when the following  conditions are met     e The ignition is on       The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO and  the light sensor detects daytime light       The exterior lamp control is turned to t
9.     If your vehicle has this option  the cigarette lighter is  located inside the ashtray and can be operated  whenever the ignition is turned to ON     Press the lighter all the way in and release it  It will pop  back out once the element is ready for use     The cigarette lighter should not be used as an accessory  power outlet  Use the accessory power outlet provided  in the center console     Climate Controls    Climate Control System    With this system you can control the heating  cooling  and ventilation for your vehicle        Operation    To change the current mode  turn the right dial to select  one of the following     74  Vent   This mode directs air to the instrument  panel outlets     474  Bi Level   This mode directs the air to the  instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets  This  position can be used for most winter driving     vad  Floor   This mode directs the air to the floor  outlets   The right dial can also be used to select defog or    defrost modes  Information on defogging and defrosting  can be found later in this section        Fan   Turn the left dial clockwise or  counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed   The fan must be on to run the air conditioning  compressor     3 19    O  Recirculation   This mode keeps outside air from  coming into the vehicle  It can be used to prevent  outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to    help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly     Move the right dial to this po
10.     The basic  more commonly used functions of the trip  computer are shown following  Tap the MODE button to  scroll between the different sets of display     You will notice that speed related displays are in the left  window  distance related displays in the center  and  fuel related windows on the right     When the ignition is turned on  the trip computer  displays the same functions as when the ignition was  last turned off     3 36    directly beneath the gages     The trip computer can be reset when AVG SPEED or  TRIP TIME are shown on the left window  To reset   press the SET button for less than two seconds   Resetting does not affect the Odometer  Overspeed   Distance to Empty  Time to Arrival  Distance to Arrival   Instantaneous Fuel  or Remaining Fuel     Vehicle personalization is available through the trip  computer controls and display  See Vehicle  Personalization on page 2 32     AVG SPEED    This function shows the average speed  while the  engine is running  since the trip computer was reset     Odometer    This function records miles travelled since the car  was built     AVG FUEL    This function shows average fuel used since the trip  computer was reset  After resetting  a high number may  initially be shown  due to the short distance travelled  and the high fuel used when accelerating     TRIP TIME    This function shows the engine running time since the  trip computer was reset  If this exceeds 99 hours  and 59 minutes  the trip time is displayed in h
11.     When you are doing this inspection  the  vehicle could move suddenly  If the vehicle  moves  you or others could be injured        1  Before you start  be sure you have enough room  around the vehicle     2  Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  brake  See Parking Brake on page 2 23 if  necessary    Do not use the accelerator pedal  and be ready to  turn off the engine immediately if it starts    3  Try to start the engine in each gear  The starter  should work only in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N     If the starter works in any other position  contact  your GM Goodwrench dealer for service     Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check    Control System Check While parked  and with the parking brake set  try to turn  the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position       With an automatic transmission  the key should turn  to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK  P    The key should come out only in LOCK     When you are doing this inspection  the   With a manual transmission  the key should turn to    vehicle could move suddenly  If the vehicle LOCK only when the shift lever is in reverse  The  moves  you or others could be injured  key should come out only in LOCK        Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is  1  Before you start  be sure you have enough room required   around the vehicle  It should be parked on a level  surface     2  Firmly apply the parking brake  See Parking Brake  on page 2 23 if necessary     Be
12.     ccceceececneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42  Instrument Panel Cluster              0  eeeeeeeeeneee ees 3 24 Radio with Six Disc CD 2225660 veteveet ble te eee 3 43  Speedometer             ccceceececeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 25 Theft Deterrent Feature                   ccceeeeeeee eee es 3 52  Tachometer    s2iccessisisdstdiecl lene bue bedrag 3 25 Audio Steering Wheel Controls                         3 53  Safety Belt Reminder Light                     eeeeeeees 3 25 Radio Reception s   c    cssecee sees eetees ce ne ande 3 54  Air Bag Readiness Light                ceeeeeeeee eee es 3 26 Care  of YOur CDS  enese cecceceieadeeersetence ERE 3 54  Charging System Light              c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Care of Your CD Player a nns 3 54  Brake System Warning Light                  eeeeee 3 27 Backglass Antenna             ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 55    3 1    Instrument Panel Overview    Fr       The main components of the instrument panel are the following     A   B   C     Side Outlets  See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 22   Headlamps Dial  See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12   Instrument Panel Cluster  See Instrument Panel  Cluster on page 3 24    Windshield Wiper Lever  See    Windshield Wipers     under Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 5   Trip Computer Control  See Trip Computer on  page 3 36    Outlets  See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 22   Hazard Warning Lights  See Hazard Warning  Flashers on page 3 4    Sunlight Sensor  See    Automatic Headlamp System     un
13.    A lot of the    driver lost control    accidents mentioned on  the news happen on curves  Here is why     Experienced driver or beginner  each of us is subject to  the same laws of physics when driving on curves    The traction of the tires against the road surface makes  it possible for the vehicle to change its path when   you turn the front wheels  If there is no traction  inertia  will keep the vehicle going in the same direction  If   you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice  you  will understand this     The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  condition of your tires and the road surface  the angle at  which the curve is banked  and your speed  While   you are in a curve  speed is the one factor you   can control     Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve   Then you suddenly apply the brakes  Both control  systems     steering and braking     have to do their  work where the tires meet the road  Unless you  have four wheel anti lock brakes  adding the hard  braking can demand too much of those places    You can lose control     The same thing can happen if you are steering through  a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate  Those   two control systems     steering and acceleration     can  overwhelm those places where the tires meet the   road and make you lose control  See Traction Control  System  TCS  on page 4 8     What should you do if this ever happens  Ease up on  the brake or accelerator pedal  steer the vehicle the way  you want
14.    Replacement               cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeees 5 68  When to Add Engine Oil                eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 14  When to Change Engine Oil    GM Oil Life System          W   sssseeerere renerne 5 16  When to Check              cccececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 5 23  5 60  When to Check and Change                 eeeeeeeee ees 5 19    14    When to Check and What to Use 1    5 24  When to Check Power Steering Fluid                  5 36  When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter       5 18  Where to Put the Restraint                eee eeeeee eee 1 35  Why Safety Belts Work               eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 7  MM INGOWS  aas E SENERE E was ORE ERE nines 2 10   PROWGM ce aceadt ee scams ea SEERNE ES NEDE SOE EAEE 2 11  Windshield Washer                2  ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8   PUI ee rato  sence ES T E S E LEEDS KE E E ET 5 37  Windshield Wiper   Blade Replacement                  s eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 50  Windshield Wipers                 0  sececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 7  Winter DIVING res air i klaner drer 4 24  Winter  TINGS assi netna e E 5 52  Your Vehicle and the Environment                       5 6 2    
15.    These owner checks and services should be performed  at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety   dependability and emission control performance of your  vehicle  Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you  with these checks and services     Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once   Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your   vehicle  make sure they are the proper ones  as shown  in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13     At Each Fuel Fill    It is important to perform these underhood checks at  each fuel fill     Engine Oil Level Check    Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  necessary  See Engine Oil on page 5 13 for further  details     Notice  It is important to check your oil regularly  and keep it at the proper level  Failure to keep your  engine oil at the proper level can cause damage   to your engine not covered by your warranty     Engine Coolant Level Check    Check the engine coolant level and add  DEX COOL   coolant mixture if necessary  See Engine  Coolant on page 5 25 for further details     Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check    Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield  washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary     At Least Once a Month  Tire Inflation Check    Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are  inflated to the correct pressures  Do not forget to  check your spare tire  See Tires on page 5 51 for  further details     At Least Once a Year  Starter Switch Check
16.    the law in every state in the United States and in   every Canadian province says children up to some age  must be restrained while in a vehicle     Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles   they should have the protection provided by appropriate  restraints  Young children should not use the vehicle   s  adult safety belts alone  unless there is no other choice   Instead  they need to use a child restraint        People should never hold a baby in their arms  while riding in a vehicle  A baby doesn   t weigh  much     until a crash  During a crash a baby    will become so heavy it is not possible to hold  it  For example  in a crash at only 25 mph    40 km h   a 12 Ib   5 5 kg  baby will suddenly  become a 240 Ib   110 kg  force on a person   s  arms  A baby should be secured in an  appropriate restraint        1 29    Children who are up against  or very close to   any air bag when it inflates can be seriously  injured or killed  Air bags plus lap shoulder  belts offer outstanding protection for adults    and older children  but not for young children  and infants  Neither the vehicle   s safety belt  system nor its air bag system is designed for  them  Young children and infants need the  protection that a child restraint system can  provide        Q  What are the different types of add on child  restraints     A  Add on child restraints  which are purchased by the  vehicle   s owner  are available in four basic types   Selection of a particular restraint
17.    until the windshield is warmed  Otherwise the  washer fluid can form ice on the windshield   blocking your vision        The windshield washer button is located at the end of  the windshield wiper lever    W  Washer Fluid   Pull the lever towards you to spray  water onto the windshield  Washer fluid will squirt   onto the windshield and the wipers will run for a few  cycles to clear the windshield     Cruise Control    ON OFF  CANCEL Y SET_DEP    With cruise control  you can maintain a speed without  keeping your foot on the accelerator  This can really help  on long trips  Cruise control does not work unless the  vehicle speed is at least 25 mph  40 km h         Cruise control can be dangerous where you  can not drive safely at a steady speed  So  do  not use your cruise control on winding roads    or in heavy traffic     Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery  roads  On such roads  fast changes in tire  traction can cause needless wheel spinning   and you could lose control  Do not use cruise  control on slippery roads        Setting Cruise Control    If you leave your cruise control on when you  are not using cruise  you might hit a button    and go into cruise when you do not want to   You could be startled and even lose control   Keep the cruise control switch off until you  want to use cruise control        The cruise control lever is on the left side of the  steering column  The ON OFF CANCEL switch is at the  end of the lever and is activated by pushing in tow
18.   33 psi  230 kPa        How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and  ride comfort  When driving with less than the maximum  load capacity allowed for your vehicle  you can set   tire inflation pressure to the recommended amounts  shown in the following chart  Never load your vehicle  with more weight than it was designed to carry     Recommended Cold Tire Inflation    Occupant and Cargo  Weight  470 Ibs   210 kg  or Less    30 psi  210 kPa    35psi 240kPa    35 psi  240 kPa   33 psi  230 kPa     Jensen se 60 psi  420 kPa    60 psi  420 kPa    60 psi  420 kPa     Occupant and Cargo  Weight  Up to 740 Ibs   330 kg    Vehicle Capacity Weight   Front Tires Rear Tires    33 psi  230 kPa    39 psi  270 kPa     60 psi  420 kPa     5 59    When to Check    Check your tires once a month or more     Do not forget your compact spare tire  It should be at  60 psi  420 kPa   For more information about your  vehicle   s compact spare tire  see Compact Spare Tire  on page 5 77     How to Check    Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire  pressure  You can   t tell if your tires are properly inflated  simply by looking at them  Radial tires may look  properly inflated even when they   re underinflated  Check  the tire   s inflation pressure when the tires are cold    Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least  three hours or driven no more than 1 mile  1 6 km      5 60    Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem  Press  the tire gage firmly onto the valve
19.   Instead  it will be  in front of you  In a crash you could go into it     receiving neck or other injuries     The lap belt can   t do its job either  In a crash  the belt could go up over your abdomen  The  belt forces would be there  not at your pelvic  bones  This could cause serious internal  injuries    For proper protection when the vehicle is in  motion  have the seatback upright  Then sit  well back in the seat and wear your safety belt  properly     Head Restraints       To raise the height of the head restraint  pull the head  restraint up  To lower the height of the head restraint   push in the locking clip at the base of the head restraint  and push the head restraint down  The locking clip  needs to be pushed outboard on the driver   s side head  restraint and inboard on the passenger s side  The  upper edge of the head restraint should be about at eye  level  never at neck level  This position reduces the  chance of a neck injury in a crash     1 4       Seatback Latches    The front seatbacks fold  forward to let people get  into the back seat     To fold a front seatback forward  lift the entry lever  located near the top of the outboard shoulders of each  front seat  Then tilt the seatback forward  To move  the seat forward  push the button located below   the seatback latch  Then move the seat forward     For safety of front seat passengers  a weight sensor  has been built into the front seats  The seat will   not move forward if there is more than 27 lbs 
20.   Safety Belt                 c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 25  Exterior LAMPS sogne eres insigna 3 12  Filter   Engine Air Cleaner            cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teers 5 18  Finding a Station xis sscsc sa rar cdseeeddeaweeeenectentees 3 43  FINISH  Care ari ccs lan ce anene aian eaen 5 82  FINISH  Damage seiersrus mirii casina 5 84  Flash to Pass Feature 52 roere eh in 3 7  Flat Trecerea SEE SE EEN Eee 5 70  Flat Tire  Changing 32230 spend 5 71  Fluid   Automatic Transmission i c 5 19   Manual Transmission i e 5 23   Power Steering             cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee reen enke 5 36   Windshield Washer                ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eres 5 37  IM cages E EEEE E SEES ESS SEE Bee EEN SEE teko 3 54  Fog Lamp Light sees hudens Ren 3 33  Fog  Lamps  ad re ea S nende 3 14  Front Reading Lamps                 ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 16  Front Storage Area        see eee eeeeeeeee eects eee een een ees 2 31    FUSIN oiar a ES TEE ES RENE PE demesiseuchece 5 5  Additives cscccuanneccasnsccteatinacteacanateaeannacanansinadeds 5 6  California FUG  sccssev scsversecseovies seeavivegecsteedsacas 5 6  Filling a Portable Fuel Container                  0 5 9  Filling  Your  Tank  sekier iorsin re essens 5 7  Fuels in Foreign Countries                0eceseeeeeeee ee 5 7  GAGS E E ES SE RES EE ED BR SNE 20 3 35  Gasoline Octane srenteg seg 5 5  Gasoline Specifications             ssssseeeeererrereree 5 5   FUEL  REMAINING sescsteciginnecencticcecticaastttesancte    3 37   FUEL USED  nere a 3 3
21.   Set the parking brake firmly     2  Put an automatic transmission shift lever  in PARK  P   or shift a manual  transmission to FIRST  1  or  REVERSE  R       Turn off the engine and do not restart  while the vehicle is raised      Do not allow passengers to remain in the  vehicle     CAUTION   Continued        Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of  the tire farthest away from the one being  changed  That would be the tire on the other  side  at the opposite end of the vehicle                 The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and    change a tire     5 71    Removing the Spare Tire and Tools    The equipment you ll need is in the trunk  The temporary  spare wheel is stored in a compartment under the  trunk floor        1  Open the trunk and remove the spare wheel cover     The spare wheel cover has a vehicle jacking label  on it showing the instructions that should be  followed     2  Turn the wing nut on the spare tire counterclockwise  and remove it  Then lift the spare tire out of the  vehicle  See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 77 later  in this section for more information about the  compact spare     5 72       3  Remove the jack  wheel wrench  and nut cap  removal tool from storage  Your vehicle   s jack   wheel wrench  and nut cap removal tool are stored  in a container in the floor  under the spare tire     Removing the Flat Tire and Installing 2  Then use the wheel wnn to loosen all the wheel    nuts  Don   t remove them yet    me Spare ie
22.   The drinker   s body weight      The amount of food that is consumed before and  during drinking      The length of time it has taken the drinker to  consume the alcohol     According to the American Medical Association  a 180 Ib   82 kg  person who drinks three 12 ounce  355 ml   bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC   of about 0 06 percent  The person would reach the  same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce  120 ml  glasses  of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces   45 ml  of liquors like whiskey  gin or vodka        It is the amount of alcohol that counts  For example  if  the same person drank three double martinis  3 ounces  or 90 ml of liquor each  within an hour  the person   s  BAC would be close to 0 12 percent  A person   who consumes food just before or during drinking will  have a somewhat lower BAC level     There is a gender difference  too  Women generally  have a lower relative percentage of body water   than men  Since alcohol is carried in body water  this  means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC  level than a man of her same body weight will when  each has the same number of drinks     The law in an increasing number of U S  states  and  throughout Canada  sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent   In some other countries  the limit is even lower  For    example  it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany     The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United  States is 0 04 percent     The BAC will be over 0 10 perce
23.   The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not  advised  due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the  CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism     Backglass Antenna    The AM FM antenna is integrated with the rear window  defogger  located in the rear window  Be sure that   the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched  and that the lines on the glass are not damaged  If   the inside surface is damaged  it could interfere   with radio reception  Also  for proper radio reception   the antenna connector at the top center of the rear  window needs to be properly attached to the post on  the glass     Notice  Using a razor blade or sharp object to  clear the inside rear window may damage the rear  window antenna and or the rear window defogger   Repairs would not be covered by your warranty   Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp  objects     Notice  Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with  metallic film  The metallic film in some tinting  materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  radio reception  Any damage caused to your  backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials  will not be covered by your warranty     Because this antenna is built into your rear window   there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes  and vandals     If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your  vehicle  and the antenna needs to be attached to the  glass  be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for  the AM FM antenna  The
24.   Towing  Recreational Vehicle                    eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 30  TOWING  Thaler c tcct pice seeeseeesenceieescedownteanens 4 35  YOUR Vehicle  wise sictaccactaphincy ad peaa e  4 29    Traction U    Control System  TCS            ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 4 8  Transmission UNDERSPEED CHIME              0  0  ccccccee eee ee eee 2 34  Fluid  Automatic 2 2 0 0    ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 19 Underspeed Chime             ccceeecccccceeeee eee eeneeeees 3 38  Fluid  Manual          0 2  02  00eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 23  Understanding Radio Reception                    60 3 54  Transmission Operation  Automatic                 00  2 18 Uniform Tire Quality Grading               cccccceeeeeees 5 66  Transmission Operation  Manual                     0665 2 21 United States     Customer Assistance                    7 4  Transmission  Transaxle  Transfer Case Unit i pi eral Shang ERE wane    Repair Manual                   cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 sing Cleaner on Fabric                cceceeeeeee seen eee    Transportation Options ossessi esnean 7 7  Tip A B eh csctetenctieweedssgecextestandhadiunsd eee 3 40  Trip Computer              cceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeee ects eeeeen ees 3 36 V  TRIP COMPUTER A  amp  B         ecceceecceeeeeeneeeeen ees 2 34 Vehicle  Trip Computer Notes               c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 3 40 Control 4 5  Trip Computer Warning Messages                           3 41 Damage Warnings re ae AM  Trip  Distance  a   cscsvegscaxc ver
25.   are not even aware of it                hi    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  ME TN  UAU   lt 9 Lint if    Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble  On a wet  road  you can not stop  accelerate or turn as well  because your tire to road traction is not as good as on  dry roads  And  if your tires do not have much tread   left  you will get even less traction  It is always wise to  go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while   you are driving  The surface may get wet suddenly when  your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement     The heavier the rain  the harder it is to see  Even if your Driving too fast through large water puddles or even    windshield wiper blades are in good shape  a heavy going through some car washes can cause problems   rain can make it harder to see road signs and too  The water may affect your brakes  Try to avoid  traffic signals  pavement markings  the edge of the road puddles  But if you can not  try to slow down before you  and even people walking  hit them     It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in  good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled  with washer fluid  Replace your windshield wiper   inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing    areas on the windshield  or when strips of rubber start to Wet brakes can cause accidents  They will not  separate from the inserts     work as well in a quick stop and may cause  pulling to one side  You could lose control of  the vehicle     After d
26.   audio system  and other general vehicle systems to the factory  default settings  Use the up or down arrows to select  Yes or No  Press the MODE button to continue  If Yes  is selected  the next feature will be displayed after a  two second delay  This delay is to allow time for   the default parameters to be set     2 33    UNDERSPEED CHIME    This option is used to enable or disable the underspeed  chime  Overspeed provides a chime when your  travelling speed exceeds the overspeed chosen value   whereas underspeed provides an additional chime   to indicate when your travelling speed again drops below  the overspeed  Use the up or down arrows to select  Yes or No  If Yes is selected  the underspeed chime is  activated  Press the MODE button to continue  The  default selection is No     DIST TO ARRIVAL DISPLAY    This option is used to enable or  disable the Time to  Arrival Distance to Arrival Remaining Fuel set of  displays  Use the up or down arrows to select Yes or  No  If Yes is selected  the Time to Arrival Distance  to Arrival Remaining Fuel set of displays is activated   Press the MODE button to continue  The default  selection is No     ARRIVAL DEFAULT    The Distance to Arrival  can be reset  when not in  personalization mode  by pressing the SET button for  less than two seconds  The distance resets to 300 miles   500 km   which is the default setting  When in  personalization mode  the default setting can be altered  up or down with the up or down arrows  When c
27.   be undamaged  try another ignition key  At this time   you may also want to check the fuse  See Fuses   and Circuit Breakers on page 5 87 for more information  on fuses  If the engine still does not start with the   other key  your vehicle needs service  If your vehicle  does start  the first key may be faulty  See your dealer  who can service the theft deterrent system to have   a new key made     If you are ever driving and the security light comes on  and stays on  you will be able to restart your engine   if you turn it off  The theft deterrent system  however  is  not working properly and must be serviced by your  dealer  Your vehicle is not protected by the  theft deterrent system at this time     In an emergency  contact Roadside Assistance  See  Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 5     2 13    Content Theft Deterrent  Your vehicle has a theft deterrent alarm system     Arming the System    The alarm system is turned on when the LOCK button  on the key is pressed  Therefore  locking the doors   by pressing LOCK not only locks all the doors but  after  a short delay  also sets the alarm system  When the  system is armed  the alarm is triggered when any of the  doors  hood or trunk are opened or a hot wire  attempted  The alarm system thinks a break in has  occurred  An alarm sounds and the turn signals   and dome light will flash     When the alarm system is turned on  you may open the  trunk by pressing the trunk symbol button on the key   This does not set off th
28.   grime   smoke and fingerprints     Removes dirt and grime  from chrome wheels and  wire wheel covers     Removes dust   fingerprints  and surface  contaminants  Spray on  wipe off     esp  Usage    Swirl Remover Polish    Cleaner Wax    Foaming Tire Shine  Low Gloss    Wash Wax Concentrate    Spot Lifter    Odor Eliminator    Removes swirl marks  fine  scratches and other light  surface contamination     Removes light scratches  and protects finish     Cleans  shines and  protects in one easy step   no wiping necessary     Medium foaming  shampoo  Cleans and  lightly waxes   Biodegradable and  phosphate free     Quickly and easily  removes spots and stains  from carpets  vinyl and  cloth upholstery     Odorless spray odor  eliminator used on fabrics   vinyl  leather and carpet     See your General Motors parts department for these  products  See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  on page 6 13        5 85    Vehicle Identification    Vehicle Identification Number  VIN       6H8U2X37F2L000000_        This is the legal identifier for your vehicle  It appears on  a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel  on  the driver   s side  You can see it if you look through the  windshield from outside your vehicle  The VIN also  appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  labels and the certificates of title and registration     Engine Identification    The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code  This  code will help you identify your engine  specifications  
29.   or remove  brake fluid  as necessary  only when  work is done on the brake hydraulic system     If you have too much brake fluid  it can spill on  the engine  The fluid will burn if the engine is    hot enough  You or others could be burned   and your vehicle could be damaged  Add brake  fluid only when work is done on the brake  hydraulic system  See    Checking Brake Fluid     in this section            BRAKE       When your brake fluid falls  to a low level  your brake  warning light will come   on  See Brake System  Warning Light on   page 3 27     Checking Brake Fluid    You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap     Just look at the brake fluid reservoir  The fluid level  should be between the MIN and MAX marks on  the reservoir  If it is not  have your brake system  checked to see if there is a leak     After work is done on the brake hydraulic system  make  sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks     What to Add    When you do need brake fluid  use only DOT 4 brake  fluid  Use new brake fluid from a sealed container  only  See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on  page 6 13     Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  around the cap before removing it  This will help  keep dirt from entering the reservoir     With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake    system  your brakes may not work well  or  they may not even work at all  This could  cause a crash  Always use the proper brake  fluid        Notice     e Using the wrong fluid
30.  12 kg  on  the seat sensor     If the seatback isn   t locked  it could move    forward in a sudden stop or crash  That could  cause injury to the person sitting there  Always  press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is  locked     To return the seat to the original position after it has  been moved forward  do the following     1  Before moving the seat  ensure there are no  objects in front or behind the seat    2  Tilt the seatback  rearward until the  seatback latches  upright           3  Press and hold the  button under the front  seat lever to return  the seat to its original  position  The seat  will pause for  two seconds when it  reaches its original  position     The seatback must first be returned upright before  pressing the button  otherwise it will not pause for two  seconds at the original position  and instead will  continue rearwards until the button is released     When rear seat passengers are entering or exiting the  vehicle  it may be helpful to move the seat belt  anchor arm towards the rear of the vehicle  to avoid    tripping     Safety Belts  Safety Belts  They Are for Everyone    This part of the manual tells you how to use safety It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo  belts properly  It also tells you some things you should area  inside or outside of a vehicle  In a   not do with safety belts  collision  people riding in these areas are more  likely to be seriously injured or killed  Do not  allow people to ride in any area of your veh
31.  24 months  whichever occurs first  Any repairs  would not be covered by your warranty  Always use  DEX COOL    silicate free  coolant in your vehicle     5 25    What to Use    Use a mixture of one half clean  drinkable water and  one half DEX COOL   coolant which won   t damage  aluminum parts  If you use this coolant mixture    you don   t need to add anything else     Adding only plain water to your cooling  system can be dangerous  Plain water  or  some other liquid such as alcohol  can boil  before the proper coolant mixture will  Your    vehicle   s coolant warning system is set for the  proper coolant mixture  With plain water or the  wrong mixture  your engine could get too hot  but you would not get the overheat warning   Your engine could catch fire and you or others  could be burned  Use a 50 50 mixture of clean   drinkable water and the proper coolant        5 26    Notice  If you use an improper coolant mixture   your engine could overheat and be badly damaged   The repair cost would not be covered by your  warranty  Too much water in the mixture can freeze  and crack the engine  radiator  heater core and  other parts     If you have to add coolant more than four times a year   have your dealer check your cooling system     Notice  If you use the proper coolant  you do not  have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim  to improve the system  These can be harmful     Checking Coolant       The coolant surge tank is located in the engine  compartment on t
32.  263 3777  English    1 800 263 7854  French    1 800 263 3830  For Text Telephone devices  TTYs    Roadside Assistance  1 800 268 6800    Overseas     Customer Assistance    Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit     Mexico  Central America and  Caribbean Islands Countries   Except Puerto Rico and U S  Virgin  Islands      Customer Assistance    General Motors de Mexico  S  de R L  de C V   Customer Assistance Center   Paseo de la Reforma   2740   Col  Lomas de Bezares   C P  11910  Mexico  D F    01 800 508 0000   Long Distance  011 52 53 29 0 800    GM Mobility Program for Persons  with Disabilities    This program  available to  qualified applicants  can  reimburse you up to   1 000 toward eligible  aftermarket driver or  passenger adaptive  equipment you may require  for your vehicle  hand  controls  wheelchair   scooter lifts  etc       This program can also provide you with free resource  information  such as area driver assessment centers and  mobility equipment installers  The offer is available for   a limited period of time from the date of vehicle  purchase lease  For more details  or to determine your  vehicle   s eligibility  see your GM dealer or call the   GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935    Text telephone  TTY  users  call 1 800 833 9935     GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program   Call 1 800 GM DRIVE  463 7483  for details   All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830     Roadside Assistance Program    Security While You Travel    1 800
33.  3  Fit the jack handle onto  the jack by sliding the  open end of the  handle over the nut  end of the jack   Position the jack and  raise the jack head until  it fits firmly into  notches A and B in the  vehicle   s frame  closest to the tire being  changed     Remove the wheel nut caps as follows           Put the compact spare tire near you        1  Remove each wheel nut cap individually with the  wheel nut cap tool provided  Insert the nut cap tool  into the nut cavity  squeeze the tool to grasp the  nut cap  and pull out to remove it  Store the  nut caps in a clean area to avoid dirt getting  into them     If the nut caps are hard to remove  use the tip of  the wheel wrench to remove the nut caps     5 73    Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  dangerous  If the vehicle slips off the jack you  could be badly injured or killed  Never get    under a vehicle when it is supported only by  a jack        4  Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench  clockwise  Raise the vehicle far enough off the  ground so there is enough room for the compact  spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well     The jack handle must be unfolded to a right angle  before it is used     Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  positioned can damage the vehicle and even  make the vehicle fall  To help avoid personal  injury and vehicle damage  be sure to fit the    jack lift head into the proper location before  raising the vehicle     5  Remove all of the wheel nuts   6  Remov
34.  453 kg     5  Determine the combined weight of luggage and  cargo being loaded on the vehicle  That weight  may not safely exceed the available cargo Subtract Occupant  Weight 300 Ibs  136 kg   150 Ibs  68 kg  x2     and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4    6  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer  the load from    your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle  Available Occupant and   700 Ibs  317 kg   Consult this manual to determine how this reduces Cargo Weight      the available cargo and luggage load capacity of  your vehicle     If your vehicle can tow a trailer  see Towing a  Trailer on page 4 35 for important information  on towing a trailer  towing safety rules and  trailering tips        4 32       Loading Your Vehicle    Vehicle Capacity Weight  for Example 2   1 000 Ibs  453 kg     Subtract Occupant  750 Ibs  340 kg   150 Ibs  68 kg  x 5     Available Cargo    Example 3  Loading Your Vehicle     Wem  Description   Toa      Vehicle Capacity Weight   for Example 3   1 000 Ibs  453 kg   Subtract Occupant  Weight 1 000 Ibs  453 kg   200 Ibs  91 kg x5        250 Ibs  113 kg     Available Cargo    Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label  for specific information about your vehicle s capacity  weight and seating positions  The combined weight of  the driver  passengers  and cargo should never  exceed your vehicle s capacity weight     Certification Label The Certification label is found on the rear edge of the   driver   s door  It tel
35.  CD    If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced  due to CD R quality  the method of recording  the quality  of the music that has been recorded and the way the  CD R has been handled  You may experience an  increase in skipping  difficulty in finding tracks and or  difficulty in loading and ejecting  If these problems occur  try a known good CD     Do not add paper labels to CDs  they could get caught  in the CD player     Do not play 3 inch  8 cm  CDs without a standard  adapter disc     If an error appears on the display  see    CD Messages     later in this section     3 45    LOAD CD  amp    Press the LOAD button to load CDs  into the CD player  This CD player will hold up to  six CDs     To insert one CD  do the following   1  Turn the ignition on   2  Press and release the LOAD button     3  Wait for INSERT CD to appear on the display  the  light located to the left of the slot to flash  and for  the radio to produce a beep  if beeps are turned on   See    Confirmation Beeps    later in this section for  information about turning beeps on and off     4  Load a CD  Insert the CD partway into the slot   label side up  The player will pull the CD in     When a CD is inserted  the CD number will appear in  the CD symbol on the display  If you select an  equalization setting for your CD  it will be activated each  time you play a CD     Whether the radio is on or off  the CD will begin to play  automatically     To insert multiple CDs  do the following   1  Turn th
36.  Continued        Neither the vehicle   s safety belt system nor its  air bag system is designed for them  Young  children and infants need the protection that a    child restraint system can provide  Always  secure children properly in your vehicle  To  read how  see the part of this manual called     Older Children    or    Infants and Young  Children           There is an air bag  readiness light on the  instrument panel  which    Q  Q  shows the air bag symbol     The system checks the air bag electrical system for  malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an electrical  problem  See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3 26  for more information     1 47    Where Are the Air Bags        The right front passenger s frontal air bag is in the  instrument panel on the passenger s side    The driver   s frontal air bag is in the middle of the   steering wheel     1 48    If something is between an occupant and an  air bag  the bag might not inflate properly or it  might force the object into that person causing    severe injury or even death  The path of an  inflating air bag must be kept clear  Don   t put  anything between an occupant and an air bag   and don   t attach or put anything on the  steering wheel hub or on or near any other air  bag covering        When Should an Air Bag Inflate     The driver   s and right front passenger   s frontal air bags  are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal   or near frontal crashes  But they are designed to inflate  only
37.  ROADSIDE  762 3743     As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle  you are  automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside  Assistance program  This value added service is  intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive  in the city or travel the open road  Pontiac   s Roadside  Assistance toll free number is staffed by courteous   and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who  are available 24 hours a day  365 days a year     We will provide the following services during the  Bumper to Bumper warranty period  at no expense  to you      Fuel Delivery  Delivery of enough fuel      5 maximum  for the customer to get to the  nearest service station       Emergency Tow  Tow to the nearest dealership for  warranty service or in the event of a  vehicle disabling accident  Assistance when the  vehicle is mired in sand  mud or snow       Flat Tire Change  Installation of a spare tire will be  covered at no charge   The customer is responsible  for the repair or replacement of the tire if not  covered by a warrantable failure        Jump Start  No start occurrences which require a  battery jump start will be covered at no charge       Dealer Locator Service    In many instances  mechanical failures are covered  under Pontiac   s Bumper to Bumper warranty  However   when other services are utilized  our Roadside  Assistance Representatives will explain any payment  obligations you might incur     For prompt and efficient assistance when calling  please  provide the fol
38.  SDEYR ECR 4 24  Driving on Snow or Ice      W W GM     ssseeeeeeeere renerne 4 25  Driving Through Deep Standing Water                 4 18  Driving Through Flowing Water c e 4 18    Electrical System    Add On Equipment               c  eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seers 5 87  Fuses and Circuit Breakers               e eeeeeeeeees 5 87  Emergency Trunk Release Handle                      2 10  Emissions Inspection and Maintenance  Programs sorsra a e e E ANN 3 31  Engine  Air Cleaner Filter              cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 5 18  Battery oier ES E a E ees 5 41  Change Engine Oil Light          W u   sssseeeeeerrreee 3 33  Check and Service Engine Soon Light              3 29  Coolant perra tea e E EE 5 25  Coolant Temperature Gage     W W GW    u  ssseeeeeereeeee 3 28  Drive Belt Routing inresa aiao 6 16  Engine Compartment Overview                 6 eeee 5 12  EXMAUST epigeios ridanie hele Shy 2 27  Dill  SEER SEES SEES E tein OGRE 5 13  Overheatihgi iiome hr senere kreerede nnns 5 28  Starting eien arn er REAA E Sae 2 17  Engine Compartment Fuse Block                  0005 5 90  Engine Oil Additives              cccceeeeeeeeeee teeter ees 5 16  Entering Programming Mode      2 33  Entry  LIMINO s2  e02ciaicecicaatadenenecthamnteetnectamnetiune 3 15  Event Data Recorders  EDR         ssseseseeseserenree 7 9  EXIT OPTIONS MENU            ccc ceeeeeeeeeee skere 2 37    Exiting Programming Mode    a a 2 37  Express Down Window               ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 2 12  Extender
39.  Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  Seat Position    air    e    lf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH  system  see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for  Children  LATCH System  on page 1 38  See Top Strap  on page 1 36 if the child restraint has one     If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system   you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the  child restraint in this position  Be sure to follow the  instructions that came with the child restraint  Secure  the child in the child restraint when and as the  instructions say     1  Put the child restraint on the seat     2  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle   s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how           3  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is 4  Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock   safety belt quickly if you ever had to     5  To tighten the belt  push down on the child restraint   pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  belt back into the retractor  If you are using a  forward facing child restraint  you may find it helpful  to use your knee to push down on the child  restraint as you tighten the belt     6  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child rest
40.  Turn the radio on    Press FM AM to select FM1  FM2  or AM   Tune in the desired station    Press EQ to select the equalization     Oi Pen  se    Press and hold one of the six numbered  pushbuttons until you hear a beep  Whenever you  press that numbered pushbutton  the station   you set will return and the equalization that you  selected will be automatically stored for that  pushbutton     6  Repeat the steps for each pushbutton     3 44    ASM  Automatic Station Memory   The radio will  automatically store the six strongest AM and FM radio  stations for the current area without deleting the  preset stations that you have stored     To activate ASM do the following    1  Turn the radio on    2  Press FM AM to select FM1  FM2  or AM    3  Press the ASM button for more than two seconds   The sound will be briefly mute and SEARCH will  appear on the display while the radio is in the  process of finding and storing radio stations   When storing is complete  ASM will appear on the  display  the six strongest radio stations will be  stored  The radio station now stored on  pushbutton 1 will begin to play    4  Press any of the pushbuttons to listen to the station  stored on that pushbutton    5  To stop listening to the stations stored by ASM   press the ASM button and ASM will go off the  display    6  Repeat the above steps if you have driven out of  the stored stations    range to select new stations     Setting the Tone  Bass Treble     AUDIO  Push the AUDIO knob until BASS 
41.  Use Maintenance II if the previous  service performed was Maintenance I  Always use  Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months  or more since the last service or if the light has not  come on at all for one year     Scheduled Maintenance    0 Swe N Maintenance T   Maintenance 1  Change engine oil and filter  Reset oil life system  See Engine Oil on  page 5 13  An Emission Control Service   Visually check for any leaks or damage  See footnote  j   0 022    e    Inspect engine air cleaner filter  If necessary  replace filter  See Engine Air  Cleaner Filter on page 5 18  An Emission Control Service  See footnote f   Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear  See Tires on page 5 51  Oooo eee ee    Inspect brake system  See footnote  a   0 0   e      Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as  needed    Perform any needed additional services  See  Additional Required Services    in  this section      Inspect suspension and steering components  See oomo W    CSC    Cd   F inspect engine cooling system  See foomote           Inspect wiper blades  See footnote OC       O   O   CSC       inspect restraint system components  See footnote   0      Lubricate body components  See footnote           Fuss and upicntson page totorwnatto uses ee   Te  Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for what to use     Inspect throttle system  See footnote  g   ln a         Additional Required Services    The following services should be performed at the
42.  Weather Forecasts  What is the weather outlook  along your route  Should you delay your trip a  short time to avoid a major storm system     e Maps  Do you have up to date maps     4 21    Highway Hypnosis    Is there actually such a condition as    highway  hypnosis     Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel   Call it highway hypnosis  lack of awareness  or  whatever     There is something about an easy stretch of road with  the same scenery  along with the hum of the tires on the  road  the drone of the engine  and the rush of the   wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy  Do  not let it happen to you  If it does  your vehicle can  leave the road in  ess than a second  and you could  crash and be injured     What can you do about highway hypnosis  First  be  aware that it can happen     Then here are some tips      Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated  with a  comfortably cool interior      Keep your eyes moving  Scan the road ahead and  to the sides  Check your rearview mirrors and your  instruments frequently    e If you get sleepy  pull off the road into a rest   service or parking area and take a nap  get some    exercise  or both  For safety  treat drowsiness  on the highway as an emergency     4 22    Hill and Mountain Roads       Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from  driving in flat or rolling terrain     If you drive regularly in steep country  or if you are  planning to visit there  here are some tips that can make  your tr
43.  When securing an add on  child restraint  refer to the instructions that come with the  restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a  booklet  or both  and to this manual  The child restraint  instructions are important  so if they are not available   obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer     Where to Put the Restraint    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat  We   therefore  recommend that child restraints be secured  in a rear seat  including an infant riding in a rear facing  infant seat  a child riding in a forward facing child   seat and an older child riding in a booster seat  Never  put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger  seat  Here   s why     A child in a rear facing child restraint can be  seriously injured or killed if the right front  passenger   s air bag inflates  This is because    the back of the rear facing child restraint  would be very close to the inflating air bag   Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a  rear seat     CAUTION   Continued        If you secure a forward facing child restraint    in the right front seat  always move the front  passenger seat as far back as it will go    It is better to secure the child restraint in a  rear seat        Wherever you install it  be sure to secure the child  restraint properly     Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  peopl
44.  a closed   space  When you use anything from a container to clean  your vehicle  be sure to follow the manufacturer   s  warnings and instructions  And always open your doors  or windows when you are cleaning the inside     Never use these to clean your vehicle     Gasoline     Benzene     Naphtha     Carbon Tetrachloride     Acetone     Paint Thinner     Turpentine     Lacquer Thinner     Nail Polish Remover    They can all be hazardous     some more than  others     and they can all damage your vehicle  too     Do not use any of these unless this manual says you  can  In many uses  these will damage your vehicle       Alcohol   e Laundry Soap     Bleach   e Reducing Agents    Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle    Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and  loose dirt  Wipe vinyl  leather  plastic and painted  surfaces with a clean  damp cloth     Cleaning Fabric Carpet    Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric  and carpet  They will clean normal spots and stains  very well     You can get GM approved cleaning products from your  dealer  See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on  page 5 85     Here are some cleaning tips     Always read the instructions on the cleaner label     e Clean up stains as soon as you can     before  they set       Carefully scrape off any excess stain       Use a clean cloth or sponge  and change to a clean  area often  A soft brush may be used if stains are  stubborn       Ifa ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning  clean  t
45.  aae E E e I S 7 4  Customer Assistance Offices                    00eeeee 7 4  Customer Satisfaction Procedure                   06 7 2  GM Mobility Program for Persons  with Disabilities aa ra rese EAR  7 5  Reporting Safety Defects to General  MOOS ae een rer 7 10  Reporting Safety Defects to the United  States Government               0cccceeeeceeeeeeee ees 7 10  Roadside Assistance Program    eccerre 7 5  Service Publications Ordering Information          7 14  Daytime Running Lamps  DRL                       006 3 12  Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light               3 34  Defensive Driving                    ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2  Defogging and Defrosting                      ceeeeeeeee ee 3 20  DIGITAL SPEEDO spcrct enir saprenn 2 34  3 39  Disarming the Systemi           ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14    Dist TO  Arrival oe sake a oninia 3 37  DIST TO ARRIVAL DISPLAY   oa 2 34  Dist  to  Empty ids2 dcheseesadHiieds n 3 38  Doing Your Own Service Work          sseeeeeererererere 5 4  Dome  Lap aise doina rnap rr ceeds 3 15  Door  LOCKS LET EN EET messin nani se raeneieeaconest 2 6  DOOR LOCK INDICATION                eeeeeeeeeeee eee 2 37  Driver  Position  Safety Belt                  ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee 1 12  Driving  AU NIORT ceneo nan on aaan nE 4 15   E E E 4 19  Defense  issnin od i EEN 4 2  Dr    kem eei E EEEREN 4 2  Freeway arie reale bar blee aen  4 20  Hill and Mountain Roads       4 22  In Rain and on Wet Roads ccce 4 16  WINE aea E a S SE ENE
46.  an  asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when  mounted on a vehicle     Kilopascal  kPa   The metric unit for air pressure   There are 6 9 kPa   s to one psi     Light Truck  LT Metric  Tire  A tire used on light duty  trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles     Load Index  An assigned number ranging  from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  capacity of a tire     Maximum Inflation Pressure  The maximum cold  inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated     Maximum Load Rating  The load rating for a tire at  the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire     Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight  The sum of  curb weight  accessory weight  vehicle capacity weight   and production options weight     Normal Occupant Weight  The number of occupants a  vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds   68 kg   See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30     Occupant Distribution  Designated seating positions     Outward Facing Sidewall  The side of a asymmetrical  tire that has a particular side that faces outward   when mounted on a vehicle  The side of the tire that  contains a whitewall  bears white lettering or bears  manufacturer  brand and or model name molding that is  higher or deeper than the same moldings on the   other sidewall of the tire     Passenger  P Metric  Tire  A tire used on passenger  cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose  vehicles     Recommended Inflation Pressure  Vehicle  manufacturer s recommended tire inf
47.  and other debris  can collect     Recommended Fluids and  Usage    Fiarcubricant    Lubricants Windshield    Kleen      Washer Solvent GM Optikleen   Washer Solvent   Fluids and lubricants identified below by name  part   i  number or specification may be obtained from your   Hydraulic Clutch Fluid  Use only  dealer  Hydraulic GM Part No  U S  88958860  in    Clutch System   Canada 88901244  Super DOT 4  brake fluid       Usage   Fluid Lubricant    Engine oil which meets GM  Standard GM6094M and displays  the American Petroleum Institute  Certified for Gasoline Engines  starburst symbol  To determine the  proper viscosity for your vehicle s  engine  see Engine Oil on   page 5 13     Chassis Lubricant   GM Part No  U S  12377985  in  Parking Brake   Canada 88901242  or lubricant    Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI  2     Category LB or GC LB   Power Steering   DEXRON   III Automatic  System Transmission Fluid   Manual DEXRON   III Automatic  Transmission   Transmission Fluid   Automatic DEXRON   III Automatic  Transmission   Transmission Fluid   Multi Purpose Lubricant  Superlube  Key Lock    GM Part No  U S  12346241  in  y Canada 10953474      Engine Oil    50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable    water and use only  Engine Coolant   DEX COOL   Coolant  See Engine  Coolant on page 5 25     Hydraulic Brake Fluid  Use only  Hydraulic Brake   GM Part No  U S  88958860  in  System Canada 88901244  Super DOT 4  brake fluid          Usage   Fluid Lubricant   Usage   Fluid Lu
48.  and sand  crews can get there     Whatever the condition     smooth ice  packed  blowing  or loose snow     drive with caution     Keep your traction control system on  It improves your  ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road  Even  though your vehicle has this system  you will want to slow  down and adjust your driving to the road conditions  See  Traction Control System  TCS  on page 4 8  Also see     Winter Tires    under Tires on page 5 51     4 25    Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle   s stability  when you make a hard stop on a slippery road    Even though you have the anti lock braking system  you  will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on  dry pavement  See Braking on page 4 5       Allow greater following distance on any  slippery road       Watch for slippery spots  The road might be fine  until you hit a spot that is covered with ice  On  an otherwise clear road  ice patches may appear in  shaded areas where the sun can not reach   around clumps of trees  behind buildings or under  bridges  Sometimes the surface of a curve or  an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding  roads are clear  If you see a patch of ice ahead  of you  brake before you are on it  Try not to brake  while you are actually on the ice  and avoid  sudden steering maneuvers     4 26    If You Are Caught in a Blizzard       If you are stopped by heavy snow  you could be in a  serious situation  You should probably stay with   your vehicle unless you know fo
49.  around the child   s abdomen  In a crash  the  belt would apply force on a body area that   s  unprotected by any bony structure  This alone  could cause serious or fatal injuries  Young  children always should be secured in  appropriate child restraints        1 31    Child Restraint Systems       An infant car bed  A   a special bed made for use ina  motor vehicle  is an infant restraint system designed  to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat  surface  Make sure that the infant   s head rests toward  the center of the vehicle     1 32       A rear facing infant seat  B  provides restraint with the  seating surface against the back of the infant  The  harness system holds the infant in place and  in a crash   acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint        A forward facing child seat  C E  provides restraint for  the child   s body with the harness and also sometimes  with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields     A booster seat  F G  is a child restraint designed to  improve the fit of the vehicle   s safety belt system  Some  booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner  and  some high back booster seats have a five point harness   A booster seat can also help a child to see out the  window     1 33    How do child restraints work     rO    A child restraint system is any device designed for  use in a motor vehicle to restrain  seat  or position  children  A built in child restraint system is a  permanent part of the motor vehicle  An a
50.  as possible  Do not proceed  until satisfied that braking is possible or that the   cause of the problem has been fixed     A warning will chime if you attempt to drive off without  releasing the park brake     The Brake message will remain until the MODE button  on the trip computer is pressed  but the symbol will  remain until the problem is fixed     3 27    Anti Lock Brake System  Warning Light    To ensure that the warning  light is working  the symbol  is displayed for a short  time when the ignition is  turned to ON        If the light doesn   t come on then  have it fixed so it will  be ready to warn you if there is a problem     If there is a malfunction of the anti lock brake system   the symbol will illuminate and ABS Fault will appear    on the trip computer display  See your dealer for service     The car s brake system will still operate conventionally   only the anti lock operation is impaired     The ABS Fault message will remain until the MODE  button on the trip computer is pressed  but the symbol  will remain until the problem is fixed     3 28       Engine Coolant Temperature Gage    The temperature gage  shows the engine coolant  temperature when the  ignition is on     If the gage pointer moves into the red area  the light  comes on and you hear a chime  your engine is too hot   It means that your engine coolant has overheated     If you have been operating your vehicle under normal  driving conditions  you should pull off the road  stop your  vehicle a
51.  attached  to its anchorage points  the restraint will not  be able to protect the child correctly  Ina  crash  the child could be seriously injured or    killed  Make sure that a LATCH type child  restraint is properly installed using the  anchorage points  or use the vehicle   s safety  belts to secure the restraint  following the  instructions that came with that restraint  and  also the instructions in this manual        In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle  you  need a child restraint designed for that system     1 39    Securing a Child Restraint Designed  for the LATCH System    1  Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating  position you want to use  where the bottom of the  seatback meets the back of the seat cushion    See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for  Children  LATCH System  on page 1 38     2  Put the child restraint on the seat     3  Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the  child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the  vehicle  The child restraint instructions will show  you how     4  If the child restraint is forward facing  attach and  tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage   The child restraint instructions will show you  how  Also see Top Strap on page 1 36    5  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  simply unhook the top  tether from the top tether anchorage and then  disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH  anchorages     1 40   
52.  bag  coverings  and have them repaired or replaced   The air  bag system does not need regular maintenance       f  Lubricate all key lock cylinders  door hinges and  latches  hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hinges  and latches  More frequent lubrication may be required  when exposed to a corrosive environment  Applying  silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will  make them last longer  seal better and not stick or  squeak      g  Check system for interference or binding and for  damaged or missing parts  Replace parts as needed   Replace any components that have high effort or  excessive wear  Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise  control cables      h  Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the  vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these  conditions         In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  regularly reaches 90 F  32 C  or higher       In hilly or mountainous terrain     When doing frequent trailer towing       Uses such as found in taxi  police or delivery  service       Uses such as high performance operation    i  Drain  flush and refill cooling system  See Engine  Coolant on page 5 25 for what to use  Inspect hoses   Clean radiator  condenser  pressure cap and filler neck   Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap    j  A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a    problem  Have the system inspected and repaired and  the fluid level checked  Add fluid if needed     Owner Checks and Services 
53.  be adjusted to Early  Normal   or Late  See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 32     Leaving the headlamps and parking lamps on when the  engine is not running will eventually drain the battery   To prevent the battery from draining  the headlamp and  parking lamps will switch off when the ignition has   been switched off and the driver   s door is opened   because the vehicle senses that the driver has forgotten  to switch off the lights  The lights stay off until the  ignition is again switched on  or the lights are turned  back on manually by the headlamp switch  The  headlamps can be set to automatically switch off after  you have locked the vehicle and walked away  To set or  adjust the time delay from when the driver s door is  opened to when the lights automatically switch off  see  Vehicle Personalization on page 2 32  If you wish to  have the lights on when leaving the vehicle  wait   until they have been automatically switched off  then  turn the light switch first to off  then to parking lamps or  headlamps     3 13    Fog Lamps    The dial to the left of the steering wheel on the  instrument panel also controls the fog lamps     40  Fog Lamp   When using the fog lamps  the  ignition must be on as well as the parking lamps or the  low beam headlamps  If the high beam headlamps   are activated or flashed  the fog lamps will turn off     Pull the exterior lamp adjuster dial out to turn the fog  lamps on  and push the dial in to turn the fog lamps off   The indicator
54.  beam changer indicator will display on the  instrument panel cluster  The fog lamps are turned off  while this feature is active     Windshield Wipers       The lever on the right side of the steering column  operates the windshield wipers and washer     These functions operate when the ignition is turned  to ON     INT  Intermittent   Push the lever up to turn on the  wipers  Put the lever in the first position for intermittent  wiping cycles  The delay will change as your vehicle   s  speed changes  The delay will decrease as you go  faster and increase as you go slower     1  Low Speed   Put the lever in the second position for  slow  steady wiping cycles     2  High Speed   Put the lever in the third position for  rapid wiping cycles        Mist   Move the lever to this position for a single  wiping cycle  Hold it there until the windshield wipers  start  then let go  The windshield wipers will stop after  one wipe  If you want more wipes  hold the lever  down longer     0  Off   Turn the lever to this position to turn off  the wipers     Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades   before using them  If they   re frozen to the windshield   gently loosen or thaw them  If the blades do become   damaged  install new blades or blade inserts     Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor  A  circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down   Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload     Windshield Washer    In freezing weather  do not use your washer 
55.  can badly damage brake  system parts  For example  just a few drops of  mineral based oil  such as engine oil  in your  brake system can damage brake system  parts so badly that they will have to be replaced   Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of  fluid     e If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle   s painted  surfaces  the paint finish can be damaged  Be  careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle  If  you do  wash it off immediately  See Appearance  Care on page 5 78     5 39    Brake Wear    Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes     Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake  squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  applied  This does not mean something is wrong with  your brakes     Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  prevent brake pulsation  When tires are rotated  inspect  brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in  the proper sequence to GM torque specifications     Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  axle sets     Brake Pedal Travel    See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  normal height  or if there is a rapid increase in  pedal travel  This could be a sign of brake trouble     5 40    Brake Adjustment    Every time you make a moderate brake stop  your disc  brakes adjust for wear  If you rarely make a moderate  or heavier stop  then your brakes might not adjust  correctly  If you drive in that way  then     very   carefully     make a few moderate brake stops about  ev
56.  capacity  weight  The Tire and Loading Information label is  attached to the center pillar  near the driver   s door latch     The Tire and Loading Information label also gives you  the size and recommended inflation pressure for   the factory installed  original equipment tires on your  vehicle at the maximum vehicle capacity weight    For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on  page 5 51 and Inflation   Tire Pressure on page 5 58     There is also important loading information on the  Certification label  It tells you the Gross Vehicle  Weight Rating  GVWR  and the Gross Axle Weight  Rating  GAWR  for the front and rear axle  see     Certification Label    later in this section     4 31    Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit    1  Locate the statement    The combined weight of  occupants and cargo should never exceed  XXX pounds    on your vehicle placard     2  Determine the combined weight of the driver and  passengers that will be riding in your vehicle     3  Subtract the combined weight of the driver and  passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds        4  The resulting figure equals the available amount of  cargo and luggage load capacity  For example  if  the    XXX    amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be Example 1  five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle  the amount Loading Your Vehicle    of available cargo and luggage load capacity is    650 Ibs  1400     750  5 x 150    650 Ibs     tem   TEE  ea  ehicle Capacity Weig  recipe te 1 000 Ibs 
57.  children           The main key can be used  for the ignition  as well as  all locks  except for the  glovebox     There is another key that  locks and unlocks the  glovebox     This key can usually be kept in the unlocked glovebox   Then  when leaving your vehicle and master key   with a car park attendant  you can lock valuables in the  glovebox and take the glovebox key with you     When a new key is delivered  it will come with a bar  coded tag attached to the key ring  Keep the bar code  tag that came with the original keys  Give this tag   to your dealer if you need a new key made     The vehicle comes with a security card that lists various  security numbers for your vehicle  including key  numbers  and the radio PIN  Please keep the card ina  safe place  away from your vehicle     If a replacement key is needed  you will have to go to  the dealership and make a request  If a key is lost  your  vehicle will have to be towed to a dealer to receive a  new key     In an emergency  contact Pontiac Roadside Assistance   See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 5 for  more information     Notice  If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle   you may have to damage the vehicle to get in   Be sure you have spare keys     Remote Keyless Entry System    Your keyless entry system operates on a radio  frequency subject to Federal Communications  Commission  FCC  Rules     This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions    
58.  coolant on a hot engine        When the level is correct  replace the cap and turn  clockwise until secure     5 28    Engine Overheating    Immediate action is required if your engine overheats   This is indicated by the coolant temperature gage   and the Engine Temp Hot message on the trip computer  display  Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on   page 3 28     If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine       If No Steam Is Coming From Your  Engine    An overheat warning  along with an Engine Temp Hot  Steam from an overheated engine can burn message can indicate a serious problem    you badly  even if you just open the hood  Stay If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear  away from the engine if you see or hear steam no steam  the problem may not be too serious   coming from it  Just turn it off and get Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you  everyone away from the vehicle until it cools do the following    down  Wait until there is no sign of steam or       Climb a long hill on a hot day  coolant before you open the hood       Stop after high speed driving    If you keep driving when your engine is  overheated  the liquids in it can catch fire  You  or others could be badly burned  Stop your   Tow a trailer  engine if it overheats  and get out of the   vehicle until the engine is cool     e Idle for long periods in traffic       Notice  If your engine catches fire because you  keep driving with no coolant  your vehicle can   be badly damaged  The costly
59.  e you are going 15 to 19 mph  24 to 31 km h  and  e you are 21 percent throttle or less     Parking Brake       To set the parking brake  pull up on the parking brake  handle without pressing the release button  If the ignition  is on  the brake system warning light will come on    See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 27     To release the parking brake  hold the regular brake  pedal down  Pull the parking brake handle up until you  can press the release button  Hold the release button  in as you move the brake handle all the way down     Notice  Driving with the parking brake on can  overheat the brake system and cause premature  wear or damage to brake system parts  Verify that  the parking brake is fully released and the brake  warning light is off before driving     2 23    Shifting Into Park  P  1  Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  set the parking brake     2  Move the shift lever into PARK  P        Press in and hold the shift lever button  located  on the top of the shift lever     It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle   Push the lever all the way toward the front of the  if the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with vehicle   the parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can 3  Turn the ignition key to Lock     roll  you have left the  engine running  the 4  Remove the key and take it with you  If you can    leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your    vehicle can move suddenly  You or others  could be injured  To be sure your ve
60.  ee eee 1 53   Restraint Systems   CHECKING arr ian a a a 1 52   Replacing Parts                ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 1 53  Retained Accessory Power  RAP  accenn 2 17  Right Front Passenger Position  Safety Belts        1 20  Roadside   Assistance Program             seceeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeas 7 5  Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out                     4 29  Routing  Engine Drive Belt neneeese 6 16  Running Your Engine While You Are Parked         2 28    Safety Belt    PretensiOnerS           2   2ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 25  Reminder LIQGMt ss ic  ccscnecatantanset neck nenen 3 25  Safety Belts  CARS OF  saz cs voneaitesasecsneresientetasmsatacdvestueeertend 5 81  Driver POSON Eee lean 1 12  How to Wear Safety Belts Properly                  1 12  Questions and Answers About Safety Belts       1 10  Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children  and Small Adults                 c0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 23  Rear Seat Passengers            cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 20  Right Front Passenger Position                   0  1 20  Safety Belt Extender                cc eeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 25  Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy                   1 19  Safety Belts Are for Everyone             0 ceeeeeeeees 1 6  Safety Warnings and Symbols                e eeeeeeeeeeees iii  Scheduled Maintenance                0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 4  Seatback Latches                 cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4  Seats  Head Restraints               cccceeceeeeee sees eeeeeeeee
61.  first maintenance service  I or II  after the indicated miles   kilometers  shown for each item  i i  Additional Required Services      i 3 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000   150 000  Service and Miles  Kilometers     447500     837000     125 000     166 000     207 500     240 000   Inspect fuel system for damage  or leaks   Inspect exhaust system for loose or  damaged components     Replace engine air cleaner filter   See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on  page 5 18  An Emission Control  Service     Change automatic transmission  fluid and filter  severe service    See footnote  h      Change automatic transmission  fluid and filter  normal service         Additional Required Services  cont   d       ETT 25 000   50 000   75 000   100 000   125 000   150 000  Service and Miles  Kilometers     41 500     837000     125 000     166 000     207 500     240 000     Replace spark plugs  Inspect spark  plug wires  An Emission Control  Service     Engine cooling system service    or every 5 years  whichever occurs  first   An Emission Control Service   See footnote  i      Inspect engine accessory drive belt   An Emission Control Service        Maintenance Footnotes      The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to   the completion of the vehicle   s useful life  We  however   urge that all recommended main
62.  following     Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle     If so  reinstall the fuel cap  making sure to fully install  the cap  See Filling Your Tank on page 5 7  The  diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has  been left off or improperly installed  A loose or missing  fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere   A few driving trips with the cap properly installed  should turn the light off     Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water     If so  your electrical system may be wet  The condition  will usually be corrected when the electrical system  dries out  A few driving trips should turn the light off     Have you recently changed brands of fuel     If so  be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel  See  Gasoline Octane on page 5 5  Poor fuel quality will  cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed   You may notice this as stalling after start up  stalling  when you put the vehicle into gear  misfiring  hesitation  on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration   These  conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up    This will be detected by the system and cause the   light to turn on     If you experience one or more of these conditions   change the fuel brand you use  It will require at least  one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off     If none of the above steps have made the light turn off   your dealer can check the vehicle  Your dealer has   the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fi
63.  frequently updated  Therefore  as  conditions become suited to more economical driving  the Dist to Empty may actually increase  for example  from city to highway driving     In addition  movement of fuel in the tank can cause the  reading to fluctuate when the fuel level is low     3 38    INST FUEL    This function shows instantaneous fuel usage in  gallons liters per 60 miles  kilometers when driving   When speed drops below 6 mph  10 km h  the usage is  shown in gallons per hour     O Speed P2  Overspeed Presets     Instead of adjusting overspeed up and down in  increments of 3 mph  5km h   you can set four  commonly used speeds  Hold down the MODE button  for two seconds when the overspeed display is  shown  The display changes from normal overspeed  operation to overspeed preset  P1 is the first preset  number  with a default setting of 35 mph  60 km h    Tap the up arrow to see the other three presets     The overspeed preset display has now replaced the  normal overspeed display  Tap the MODE button  to scroll through the other displays     To change the display back to normal overspeed  hold  down the MODE button for two seconds while the  overspeed preset display is shown     Altering Overspeed Presets    The default overspeed settings can be changed for your  individual preference     The car must be standing still when changing a preset   Ensure the preset you wish to change is showing   Then briefly press the SET button  The display starts to  flash  Use the up 
64.  frustration or anger    can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the    worst of all traffic accidents     the head on collision   So here are some tips for passing     e    Drive ahead     Look down the road  to the sides  and to crossroads for situations that might affect  your passing patterns  If you have any doubt    whatsoever about making a successful pass  wait    for a better time       Watch for traffic signs  pavement markings and  lines  If you can see a sign up ahead that might    indicate a turn or an intersection  delay your pass     A broken center line usually indicates it is all  right to pass  providing the road ahead is clear      Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or    a double solid line  even if the road seems empty  of approaching traffic     4 12    Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  pass while you are awaiting an opportunity  For one  thing  following too closely reduces your area of  vision  especially if you are following a larger  vehicle  Also  you will not have adequate space if  the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops    Keep back a reasonable distance     When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up   start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and   do not get too close  Time your move so you will be  increasing speed as the time comes to move into  the other lane  If the way is clear to pass  you   will have a    running start    that more than makes up  for the distance you would lose by 
65.  has  been drinking     driver or passenger     is in a crash   that person   s chance of being killed or permanently  disabled is higher than if the person had not been  drinking     Drinking and then driving is very dangerous   Your reflexes  perceptions  attentiveness and  judgment can be affected by even a small    amount of alcohol  You can have a   serious     or even fatal     collision if you drive  after drinking  Please do not drink and drive or  ride with a driver who has been drinking  Ride  home in a cab  or if you are with a group   designate a driver who will not drink        Control of a Vehicle    You have three systems that make your vehicle go  where you want it to go  They are the brakes  the steering  and the accelerator  All three systems have to do their  work at the places where the tires meet the road        Sometimes  as when you are driving on snow or ice  it  is easy to ask more of those control systems than   the tires and road can provide  That means you can lose  control of your vehicle  Also see Traction Control  System  TCS  on page 4 8     Braking    Braking action involves perception time and  reaction time     First  you have to decide to push on the brake pedal   That is perception time  Then you have to bring up your  foot and do it  That is reaction time     Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second  But that  is only an average  It might be less with one driver   and as long as two or three seconds or more with  another  Age  physi
66.  has anti lock brakes  ABS is an advanced  electronic braking system that will help prevent a  braking skid     When you start your engine and begin to drive away   your anti lock brake system will check itself  You   may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while  this test is going on  and you may even notice that your  brake pedal moves a little  This is normal     If there is a problem with  the anti lock brake system   this warning light will   stay on  See Anti Lock  Brake System Warning  Light on page 3 28        Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely   Suddenly  an animal jumps out in front of you  You slam  on the brakes and continue braking  Here is what  happens with ABS    A computer senses that wheels are slowing down  If  one of the wheels is about to stop rolling  the computer  will separately work the brakes at each wheel    The anti lock system can change the brake pressure  faster than any driver could  The computer is  programmed to make the most of available tire and road  conditions  This can help you steer around the obstacle  while braking hard     As you brake  your computer keeps receiving updates  on wheel speed and controls braking pressure  accordingly     Remember  Anti lock does not change the time you  need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always  decrease stopping distance  If you get too close to   the vehicle in front of you  you will not have time to apply  your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops   Alw
67.  if the impact speed is above the system   s  designed    threshold level        If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that  does not move or deform  the threshold level is about   11 to 17 mph  18 to 28 km h   The threshold level can  vary  however  with specific vehicle design  so that it can  be somewhat above or below this range  If your vehicle  strikes something that will move or deform  such as a  parked car  the threshold level will be higher     The driver   s and right front passenger   s frontal air bags  are not designed to inflate in rollovers  rear impacts    or in many side impacts because inflation would not help  the occupant     In any particular crash  no one can say whether an air  bag should have inflated simply because of the damage  to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were   Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact   and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and  near frontal impacts     1 49    What Makes an Air Bag Inflate     In an impact of sufficient severity  the air bag sensing  system detects that the vehicle is in a crash  The  sensing system triggers a release of gas from the  inflator  which inflates the air bag  The inflator  air bag   and related hardware are all part of the air bag  modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument  panel in front of the right front passenger     How Does an Air Bag Restrain     In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions   even belted occu
68.  it to go  and slow down     Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  adjust your speed  Of course  the posted speeds   are based on good weather and road conditions  Under  less favorable conditions you will want to go slower     If you need to reduce your speed as you approach  a curve  do it before you enter the curve  while your front  wheels are straight ahead     Try to adjust your speed so you can    drive    through the  curve  Maintain a reasonable  steady speed  Wait to  accelerate until you are out of the curve  and then  accelerate gently into the straightaway     4 10    Steering in Emergencies    There are times when steering can be more effective  than braking  For example  you come over a hill and find  a truck stopped in your lane  or a car suddenly pulls   out from nowhere  or a child darts out from between  parked cars and stops right in front of you  You   can avoid these problems by braking     if you can stop  in time  But sometimes you can not  there is not   room  That is the time for evasive action     steering  around the problem     Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  these  First apply your brakes     but  unless you  have anti lock  not enough to lock your wheels     See Braking on page 4 5  It is better to remove as much  speed as you can from a possible collision  Then   steer around the problem  to the left or right depending  on the space available           An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
69.  lane change     To signal a lane change  just raise or lower the lever  until the arrow starts to flash  Hold it there until you  complete your lane change  The lever will return by itself  when you release it     As you signal a turn or a lane change  if the arrows  flash rapidly  a signal bulb may be burned out and other  drivers won t see your turn signal     If a bulb is burned out  replace it to help avoid an  accident  If the arrows don   t go on at all when you signal  a turn  check for burned out bulbs and then check the  fuse  See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 87     Headlamp High Low Beam Changer    To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam  with the headlamps on  push the turn signal multifunction  lever away from you  The headlamps will change from  low beam to high beam     When the high beams are  on  a light on the  instrument panel cluster  also will be on if the  ignition is on     If the fog lamps are on when the high beam headlamps  are activated  the fog lamps will turn off  The fog   lamp indicator in the instrument panel cluster will   turn off     Flash to Pass Feature    This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to  signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass   even if the headlamps and ignition are turned off     To use it  pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward  you until the high beam headlamps come on  then  release the lever to turn them off     If flash to pass is activated  then the headlamp  high low
70.  light in the knob will come on when the  fog lamps are working     Headlamps and Dimming Instructions    When the headlamps are switched on  the instrument  panel is automatically illuminated  Once illuminated  you  can adjust their brightness  Some illuminated areas   of the vehicle have been linked to the brightness control   such as the trip computer  headlamp switch  radio    etc  This means that the interior lights can be adjusted  to your preference  When the headlamps are turned   off and back on again  the brightness level reverts to the  last adjusted setting  See Interior Lamps on page 3 15  for more information     3 14    Headlamps On When Approaching the  Vehicle    Your vehicle is designed to provide additional security   when returning to the vehicle at night  When the  UNLOCK or LOCK button on the key is used  the car   s  exterior lights will come on for a preset time or until   the car is relocked  This feature only works if the  headlamp control is in the AUTO or headlamp positions     To set or adjust the time the headlamps stay on after  the UNLOCK button has been pressed  see Vehicle  Personalization on page 2 32     Interior Lamps  Instrument Panel Brightness    When the parking lamps  are turned on  the interior  instruments are  automatically illuminated  and you can adjust   the brightness  Move the  tab clockwise to increase  brightness and  counterclockwise to  decrease brightness        Courtesy Lamps    When a door is open  the courtesy lamps wi
71.  nctvvdeasatiucenadistetarerie 3 37 Loading KR a ERNEST  TRIP TIME minnn engade aaaea 3 37 Parking YoUr 2 26  de oo AED  3 ah Soe Soon Light     00   ceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 34  Samir E nega SEE SEE genera Ae VIM DONS aei poa a aa IV  Trunk LOCK             00000e TERT 2 8 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data  Turn and Lane Change Signals                c eeeeeeees 3 6 Recorders 7 9  Turn Signal Multifunction Lever              ceeeeeeeeeee ee 3 5 Vehicle Identification 688       TWO STAGE UNLOCK   0    scenerne 2 36 Number  VIN  osainen 5 86  Service Parts Identification Label                     5 86  Vehicle Personalization                     cceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 32  Vehicle Storage           ccceeceeeeeeneeeeeneee eee renerne 5 41  Ventilation Adjustment                ceceeeeeeeeeenee eee eees 3 22  VISOIS  secesessscevecsyeeeecaciesveeeasiexeced yiwdeceasevecesa ee 2 12    13    W    Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators                  3 23  Warnings   Hazard Warning Flashers ccecce 3 4   Other Warning Devices                 cseeeeeneeeeeee ees 3 4   Safety and Symbols              cceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenes iii   Vehicle Damage esi c serds nere es iv  Washing Your Vehicle                  ceeeeeeeneeeteeeeee es 5 82  What Kind of Engine Oil to Use                     065 5 14  What to Do with Used Oil                eeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 17  What to Use 2 0 0    eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee ees 5 26  5 36  5 37  Wheels   Alignment and Tire Balance                 cee 5 67
72.  proper 2  Keep turning the pressure cap slowly  and  coolant mixture  remove it     Your engine could catch fire and you or others  could be burned  Use a 50 50 mixture of clean   drinkable water and DEX COOL   coolant        5 34    3  Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper  mixture to the COLD FILL mark     4  With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off  start  the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  radiator hose getting hot  Watch out for the  engine cooling fan     By this time  the coolant level inside the coolant  surge tank may be lower  If the level is lower than  the COLD FILL mark  add more of the proper  mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level  reaches the mark     5  Then replace the pressure cap  Be sure the  pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated        See your dealer  if necessary     5 35    Power Steering Fluid       When to Check Power Steering Fluid    See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12  for reservoir location     It is not necessary to regularly check power steering  fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or  you hear an unusual noise  A fluid loss in this system  could indicate a problem  Have the system inspected  and repaired     5 36    How to Check Power Steering Fluid    The fluid level should be checked after the vehicle has  been driven for at least 20 minutes  so that the fluid   is warm  A convenient time is when stopping for   gas  The cold level check should only be used aft
73.  ready to apply the regular brake immediately if  the vehicle begins to move     3  With the engine off  turn the key to the ON position   but do not start the engine  Without applying the  regular brake  try to move the shift lever out  of PARK  P  with normal effort  If the shift lever  moves out of PARK  P   contact your GM  Goodwrench dealer for service     Parking Brake and Automatic  Transmission Park  P  Mechanism Check    When you are doing this check  your vehicle  could begin to move  You or others could be    injured and property could be damaged  Make  sure there is room in front of your vehicle in  case it begins to roll  Be ready to apply the  regular brake at once should the vehicle begin  to move     6 12       Park on a fairly steep hill  with the vehicle facing  downhill  Keeping your foot on the regular brake  set the  parking brake       To check the parking brake   s holding ability  With  the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL  N    slowly remove foot pressure from the regular  brake pedal  Do this until the vehicle is held by the  parking brake only       To check the PARK  P  mechanism   s holding  ability  With the engine running  shift to PARK  P    Then release the parking brake followed by the  regular brake     Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is  required     Underbody Flushing Service    At least every spring  use plain water to flush any  corrosive materials from the underbody  Take care to  clean thoroughly any areas where mud
74.  remain until the fuel tank is   filled above the low fuel level  If the Very Low Fuel  message in the trip computer comes on when driving  it  indicates that the fuel level is very low  The Very   Low Fuel message is displayed until the MODE button  on the trip computer switch is pressed  The trip  computer then displays its calculation of miles to empty  for 10 seconds before reverting to the original trip  computer display with a small flashing low fuel symbol  on the left  The symbol will remain until the fuel tank   is filled above the very low fuel level     3 37    O SPEED  Overspeed     Overspeed sets the speed you don   t want to exceed   For example  if driving in a 45 mph zone  set  OVERSPEED to 45 mph  by tapping the up or down  arrows  The overspeed setting is displayed in the   left window  When the vehicle speed exceeds the  setting  the overspeed warning message and an audible  chime warns you that you are speeding  At that time  the trip computer automatically shows the overspeed  display  allowing you to make adjustments if required   If in the Overspeed preset  press and hold MODE   for two seconds     Underspeed Chime    Overspeed provides a chime when your travelling speed  exceeds the overspeed value  whereas underspeed  provides a chime to indicate when your travelling speed  again drops below the overspeed     Dist to Empty    Distance to empty is an estimate of how far your current  fuel level will last  It is based on your previous fuel  usage and is
75.  repairs would not be  covered by your warranty     5 29    If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam   try this for a minute or so     1  In heavy traffic  let the engine idle in NEUTRAL  N   while stopped  If it is safe to do so  pull off the road   with the parking brake applied  shift to PARK  P   or NEUTRAL  N  and let the engine idle while  you get out and check that the cooling fan is  working     2  If the fan is working and the temperature gauge  needle has not returned to its normal position  within a few minutes  stop the engine and remove  the ignition key   Look for leaks at the radiator hoses and  connections  heater hoses and connections   radiator  and water pump  Be careful when checking  these areas as they will probably still be hot  If  you find a major leak or other problems that may  have caused the engine to overheat  do not run the  engine until these problems have been corrected   If you do not find anything wrong  you should check  the engine coolant level  See Engine Coolant on  page 5 25  You should also check the air intake  area below the front bumper to ensure that it is clear  of leaves and road grime     5 30    3  Turn off your air conditioning and turn on your  heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and  open the window as necessary     If you no longer have the overheat warning  you can  drive  Just to be safe  drive slower for about 10 minutes   If the warning doesn   t come back on  you can drive  normally     If the warn
76.  seat     1 43    3  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle   s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions    will show you how        5  Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  the retractor to set the lock        4  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to     1 44    6  To tighten the belt  push down on the child restraint   pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  belt back into the retractor  You may find it helpful  to use your knee to push down on the child  restraint as you tighten the belt     7  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle   s  safety belt and let it go back all the way  The safety   belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an  adult or larger child passenger        1 45    Air Bag Systems    This part explains the air bag system     Your vehicle has a frontal air bag for the driver and  another frontal air bag for the right front passenger     Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of  injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag    But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their  job and comply with federal regulations     Here are the most important things to kn
77.  shift into REVERSE  R   Just apply pressure  to get the lever past FIFTH  5  and SIXTH  6  into  REVERSE  R   Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while  pressing the accelerator pedal     2 21    Shift Speeds    If you skip a gear when you downshift  you    could lose control of your vehicle  You could  injure yourself or others  Don   t shift down  more than one gear at a time when you  downshift     This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for the  best fuel economy     Manual Transmission Recommended  Shift Speeds      1to2   2t03   3to4   4to5      16 mph 22 mph   30 mph   40 mph   50 i   25 km h     35 km h     48 km h     65 km h     80 km h     If your speed drops below 20 mph  32 km h   or if the  engine is not running smoothly  you should downshift to  the next lower gear        2 22       One to Four Shift Light   Manual Transmission     When this light comes on   you can only shift from  FIRST  1  to FOURTH  4   instead of FIRST  1  to  SECOND  2      14    You must complete the shift into FOURTH  4  to turn off  this feature  This helps you get the best possible fuel  economy     After shifting to FOURTH  4   you may downshift to a  lower gear if you prefer     Notice  Forcing the shift lever into any gear except  FOURTH  4  when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes   on may damage the transmission  Shift only from  FIRST  1  to FOURTH  4  when the light comes on     This light will come on when     e The engine coolant temperature is higher than  169  F  76  C     
78.  should take  into consideration not only the child   s weight  height  and age but also whether or not the restraint will  be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will  be used     1 30    For most basic types of child restraints  there are  many different models available  When purchasing a  child restraint  be sure it is designed to be used   in a motor vehicle  If it is  the restraint will have a  label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle  safety standards     The restraint manufacturer   s instructions that come  with the restraint state the weight and height  limitations for a particular child restraint  In addition   there are many kinds of restraints available for  children with special needs     Newborn infants need complete support   including support for the head and neck  This  is necessary because a newborn infant   s neck  is weak and its head weighs so much    compared with the rest of its body  In a crash   an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the  restraint  so the crash forces can be  distributed across the strongest part of an  infant   s body  the back and shoulders  Infants  always should be secured in appropriate infant  restraints        The body structure of a young child is quite  unlike that of an adult or older child  for whom  the safety belts are designed  A young child   s  hip bones are still so small that the vehicle   s  regular safety belt may not remain low on the    hip bones  as it should  Instead  it may settle  up
79.  still       Several warning lights are linked to the trip  computer displays  See Warning Lights  Gages  and  Indicators on page 3 23       When the overspeed warning symbol is first shown   the overspeed trip computer display is automatically  shown for 10 seconds  This is to show what your  pre selected speed is and allow you to adjust  it if required  After 10 seconds  the trip computer  returns to its previous display       Some displays change the units of measurement  over time  For example  the Time to Arrival shows  hours only above 99 hours and 59 minutes   and hours and minutes below  Time to Arrival also  shows 10 minute units above 2 hours  5 minute  units below 2 hours and 1 minute units below  10 minutes       If the X symbol or a Service Error message is  shown in the display  it indicates a fault in the  trip computer and you should see your vehicle  dealer     Trip Computer Warning Messages    Cruise Control    The CRUISE light along  d   with the Cruise Enabled   message on the trip   computer display will come   on whenever you set   your cruise control     See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 5     Engine Coolant Temperature Warning  If the Engine  Temp Hot message in the trip computer display   comes on while driving  it indicates that the engine  coolant temperature is dangerously hot  You should stop  the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so  The Engine  Temp Hot message is displayed until the MODE button  on the trip computer switch is pres
80.  that hold the cover on      Lift off the cover      Check or replace the engine air cleaner filter     Put the cover back on tightly     Automatic Transmission Fluid  When to Check and Change    Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter The fluid level should be checked monthly  by looking at  off can cause you or others to be burned  the fluid level on the dipstick  A good time to check  The air cleaner not only cleans the air  it helps    your automatic transmission fluid level is when    to stop flame if the engine backfires  If it is the engine ilis changed     not there and the engine backfires  you could See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more  be burned  Do not drive with it off  and be information on when to check and change the fluid  careful working on the engine with the air and filter    cleaner filter off        Notice  If the air cleaner filter is off  a backfire can  cause a damaging engine fire  And  dirt can   easily get into your engine  which will damage it   Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you  are driving     How to Check    Because this operation can be a little difficult  you may  choose to have this done at the dealership service  department     If you do it yourself  be sure to follow all the instructions  here  or you could get a false reading on the dipstick     Notice  Too much or too little fluid can damage  your transmission  Too much can mean that some  of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine  part or e
81.  that may be  unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer   Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long  Clean  your skin and nails with soap and water  or a good   hand cleaner  Wash or properly dispose of clothing or  rags containing used engine oil  See the manufacturer   s  warnings about the use and disposal of oil products     Used oil can be a threat to the environment  If you  change your own oil  be sure to drain all the oil from the  filter before disposal  Never dispose of oil by putting it   in the trash  pouring it on the ground  into sewers  or into  streams or bodies of water  Instead  recycle it by   taking it to a place that collects used oil  If you have a  problem properly disposing of your used oil  ask   your dealer  a service station or a local recycling center  for help     5 17    Engine Air Cleaner Filter    See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for  more information on location    When to Inspect the Engine Air  Cleaner Filter   Inspect the air cleaner filter at every oil change and  replace at the first oil change after 25 000 miles    40 000 km     How to Inspect the Engine Air  Cleaner Filter   To inspect the air cleaner filter  remove the filter from  the vehicle and lightly shake filter to release loose dust    and dirt  If the filter remains caked with dirt  a new  filter is required     To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter  do the  following     breed    fan       TT    1  2  3  4         Remove the screws
82.  the surface  Do not  use chrome polish on aluminum wheels     Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes  These  brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels     5 83    Cleaning Tires  To clean your tires  use a stiff brush with tire cleaner     Notice  Using petroleum based tire dressing  products on your vehicle may damage the paint  finish and or tires  When applying a tire dressing   always wipe off any overspray from all painted  surfaces on your vehicle     Sheet Metal Damage    If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  repair or replacement  make sure the body repair shop  applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or  replaced to restore corrosion protection     Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the  corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty     Finish Damage    Any stone chips  fractures or deep scratches in the  finish should be repaired right away  Bare metal   will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair  expense     Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up  materials avaliable from your dealer  Larger areas of  finish damage can be corrected in your dealer   s   body and paint shop     5 84    Underbody Maintenance    Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  control can collect on the underbody  If these are not  removed  corrosion and rust can develop on the  underbody parts such as fuel lines  frame  floor pan an
83.  to get a pressure  measurement  If the cold tire inflation pressure matches  the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading  Information label  no further adjustment is necessary  If  the inflation pressure is low  add air until you reach   the recommended amount     If you overfill the tire  release air by pushing on the  metal stem in the center of the tire valve  Recheck the  tire pressure with the tire gage     Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems   They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and  moisture     High Speed Operation    Driving at high speeds  100 mph  160 km h  or  higher  puts an additional strain on tires   Sustained high speed driving  causes  excessive heat build up and can cause sudden  tire failure  You could have a crash and you or  others could be killed  Some high speed rated  tires require inflation pressure adjustment for  high speed operation  When speed limits and  road conditions are such  that a vehicle can be  driven at high speeds  make sure the tires are  rated for high speed operation  in excellent  condition and set to the correct cold tire  inflation pressure for the vehicle load        Vehicles equipped with 245 45ZR17 95W size tires  do  not require additional air pressure for high speed  operation  If your vehicle has 235 40ZR18 91W size  tires  use the following chart to determine the cold tire  inflation pressure when operating your vehicle under  high speed conditions     Tire Size  235 40ZR18 91W Recommended C
84.  with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions     1  this device may not cause interference  and  2  this device must accept any interference received     including interference that may cause undesired  operation     This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada   Operation is subject to the following two conditions    1  this device may not cause interference  and   2  this device must accept any interference received     including interference that may cause undesired  operation of the device     Changes or modifications to this system by other than  an authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment     Immobilizer Operation    Your vehicle may have a passive theft deterrent system     The system is an electronic engine immobilizer  which  disables the car  when the key is removed from the  ignition    The system works when you turn the key to ON  The  key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer  control unit in your vehicle  The correct key will start  the vehicle     Your vehicle has a special key that works with the  theft deterrent system  There is a transponder in the key  head  If the key is ever damaged  you may not be   able to start your vehicle     When trying to start the vehicle  if the engine does not  start and the security light comes on  the key may  have a damaged transponder  Turn the ignition off and  try again     If the engine still does not start  and the key appears to
85.  you are  driving under the best conditions  the oil life system   may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over  a year  However  your engine oil and filter must be  changed at least once a year and at this time the system  must be reset  Your dealer has GM trained service  people who will perform this work using genuine GM  parts and reset the system  It is also important to check  your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level     If the system is ever reset accidentally  you must change  your oil at 3 000 miles  5 000 km  since your last oil  change  Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  the oil is changed     How to Reset the Service Engine Oil  message    The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change  your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use  Anytime  your oil is changed  reset the system so it can  calculate when the next oil change is required  If a  situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a  Service Engine Oil message being turned on  reset the  system     After changing the engine oil  reset the system by  performing the following steps   1  With the engine off  turn the ignition key to ON     2  Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly  two times within five seconds    3  Turn the key to LOCK   If the Service Engine Oil message comes back on  when you start your vehicle  the engine oil life  system has not reset  Repeat the procedure     What to Do with Used Oil    Used engine oil contains certain elements
86.  you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to     a   Yg       3  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Do not let it get twisted   The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  across you very quickly  If this happens  let the belt  go back slightly to unlock it  Then pull the belt  across you more slowly     5  To make the lap part tight  pull down on the buckle  end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt                          The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this  applies force to the strong pelvic bones  And you would  be less likely to slide under the lap belt  If you slid  under it  the belt would apply force at your abdomen   This could cause serious or even fatal injuries  The  shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across  the chest  These parts of the body are best able to take  belt restraining forces        The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a  crash  or if you pull the belt very quickly out of  the retractor     Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster    Before you begin to drive  move the shoulder belt height  adjuster to the height that is right for you     Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt  is centered on your shoulder  The belt should be   away from your face and neck  but not falling off your  shoulder     To move it up or down   squeeze the adjuster as  shown and move it to   the desired p
87.  your vehicle   s engine   is automatically disabled shortly after turning the key to  this position  This is indicated by the flashing padlock  symbol on the bottom left corner of the instrument panel     The steering column is automatically locked when the  key is removed  To release the steering wheel  insert the  key again and turn it towards the front of the vehicle     Notice  Using a tool to force the key from the  ignition switch could cause damage or break the  key  Use the correct key and turn the key only with  your hand  Make sure the key is all the way in  If   it is  turn the steering wheel left and right while you  turn the key hard  If none of this works  then   your vehicle needs service     B  ON and ACCESSORY   This position is where the  key returns to after you start your engine and release the  key  The ignition switch stays in ON when the engine   is running  But even when the engine is not running  you  can use ON to operate your electrical accessories   and to display some instrument panel warning lights     C  START   This position starts the engine  When  the engine starts  release the key  The ignition switch  will return to ON for normal driving     Retained Accessory Power  RAP     Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory  Power  RAP  feature which will allow the radio to  continue to work for one hour after the ignition is turned  to OFF  The windows will also be accessible for   15 minutes or until either door is opened     Starting Y
88. 05 2 36    AUTO LOCK IN DRIVE     Automatic Transmission Only  1    seere  2 37  Automatic Headlamp System       3 13  Automatic Transmission               ceceeeeeneeee eee eens 2 17   PIU EE ale deat acts sichia stadia E SR meat 5 19   Operatiom siriako einna E o a EENE 2 18  AVG  UBL E E E n Ekke 3 36  AVG  SPEED  sier sdeswecsceeseeestabiapivaccdelseaveeeesset 3 36  Backglass Antenna             ceceeeeeeeeeenee eee ee arten 3 55  Battery aarre EA E 2 6  5 41  Battery Run Down Protection i c 3 16  Before Leaving on a Long Trip              eee 4 21  Brake   PaK ure essens 2 23   System Warning Light 22k sees 3 27  Brake  Fl a mnene seen essensen lerede 5 38  Brake Wear susan enaned pres sees eo deena ays 5 40  Blakes nearest 5 38  Braking 22535 re ane aii 4 5  Braking in Emergencies                 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 4 8  Break In  New Vehicle                 cccccceeeeeeeeeeenes 2 15    Bulb  Replacement  sccciccccccsessccsssenccngecsncadancace eds 5 47  Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps               5 49  Halogen Bulbs  isen ss horder ele sense 5 47  Headlamps 22 rss kd ke so else 5 47  Rear Turn Signal  Stoplamps and Back Up   L  mp Srii aae E 5 49  Replacement Bulbs                   seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50   Buying  New TIES  rare ere delene 5 65   California Fuel 25222 issn ncctera dei eeaeetvenutt d seen 5 6   Canada     Customer Assistance              6 eeeeeeeeees 7 4   Capacities and Specifications                 ceeeeeee 5 92   Carbon Monoxide       
89. 1  This device may not cause interference  and   2  This device must accept any interference received     including interference that may cause undesired  operation of the device     Changes or modifications to this system by other than  an authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment     At times you may notice a decrease in range  This is  normal for any remote keyless entry system  If the  transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer  to your vehicle for the transmitter to work  try this       Check the distance  You may be too far from your  vehicle  You may need to stand closer during  rainy or snowy weather       Check the location  Other vehicles or objects may  be blocking the signal  Take a few steps to the  left or right  hold the transmitter higher  and  try again      Check to determine if battery replacement is  necessary  See    Battery Replacement    under  Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on  page 2 5    e If you are still having trouble  see your dealer or a  qualified technician for service     Remote Keyless Entry System  Operation    The buttons on your key  allow you to lock and  unlock your doors   or unlock your trunk        When pressing the key buttons  ensure that other keys  on the key ring are not between the main key and   the vehicle  Other keys can obscure the signal being  transmitted to the vehicle     When a button on the key is pressed  it sends a signal  to the vehicle  The receiver of the sig
90. 2004 Pontiac GTO Owner Manual AA       Seats and Restraint Systems                        006 1 1  Front Seats o ireren aE eeeeneeeens 1 2  Safety Belts oo  ccecceceec eee eeeeeeeeee eee een ees 1 6  Child Restraints oo    cccec eee eee ee eee eens 1 26  Air Bag Systems oo    cccceecc eee eee eee eeee ene es 1 46  Restraint System Check                ceceeceeee eee eees 1 52   Features and Controls              0cccccceeseeeseeeeeeeees 2 1  KEYS eaan ta ceeeae atta sesne DEDE 2 2  Doors and LOCKS ono    cece ccc ec ccc ee eee ee nec eenenes 2 6  WINGOWS eee e ec ec ec ec cece cee ee ec ee ee eeeeeeeenenenes 2 10  Theft Deterrent Systems              eee ee eee ee eee e ee 2 12  Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _            2 15  MINOrS    preen A e E eE eaa 2 29  Storage Areas        s snsnsnennnsnrinininrernrnrrren 2 30  Vehicle Personalization oo    cece cece ec seere 2 32   Instrument Panel              c  cccccceseeee eee eeee seas eae es 3 1  Instrument Panel Overview _                  c0cc eee ee 3 2  Climate Controls oo    cece ccc ec ccc ee ee cence ene 3 19  Warning Lights  Gages  and Indicators _         3 23  Trip Computer oo    eee eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36    Audio System s     Driving Your Vehicle                    c 00cceeseeeeeeeeees 4 1  Your Driving  the Road  and Your Vehicle __      4 2  TOWING   tenoten adea E eE 4 29   Service and Appearance Care 2    5 1  Semice  er E NE he SEE 5 3  FUG  gisiticiedcadciescensaccadecsanasebasdedesatassecesc
91. 7   Fuses  Fuses and Circuit Breakers              W  ssssceeren  5 87   Gage  Engine Coolant Temperature eccere 3 28  UG as tetas ERE Re Eee ERE ERE SES EDER 3 35  Speedometer         W W W     u  ssseeeeeere reen keen nnen 3 25  WACHOM ClO Rs rarere g haner 3 25   Gasoline  OGtANG  rr EERE E EEA NER IEAS 5 5  Specifications               ccceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 5 5   GIOVE BOX  Yerine ea encbiincsaaanesdnoncanee weirs 2 30   GM Mobility Program for Persons with  DisabilitieS arne miese eee eee iai 7 5    Hazard Warning Flashers               ceeceeeeeeeeeen tees 3 4  Head    Restraints  22cassese east udd iii 1 4  Headlamp High Low Beam Changer               0 00 3 6  Headlamps   csictivicceiescncviasshhivhses acetic aes 5 47   Bulb Replacement                  eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 47   Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps               5 49   Halogen Bulbs  se ae sonadapatcaceatseaacacnne ade 5 47  Headlamps and Dimming Instructions                   3 14  Headlamps On When Approaching the   VENICE ics secret tater nateuenencunadaecapmnsteiacataenneenes 3 14  HEADLIGHTS APPROACH TIME                0 0800 2 36  HEADLIGHTS OFF DELAY TIME                 0006 2 36  High Speed Operation             cceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 5 61  Highbeam On Light                 cceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 33  Highway HypnoSis               cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 22  Hill and Mountain Roads n c 4 22  Hood   Checking Things Under                  0eeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 10   Re
92. Amplifier  TRIP COMP    CIGAR      i ABS Anti Lock Brake Syst  ESTER  Cruise Control System  Power  ABS     i iat  lal  RADIO i SPARE    Radio System  Cellphone  CELLPHONE mene SPARE  ACC SOCKET   Accessory Power Outlet    FRONT WIPER   Front Windshield Wipers   Relays   Usage     SPARE   ARE ACC RELAY Accessory Power Outlet    Ignition Switch  PWR Ca Power Door Locks  Antenna  Power RELAY a  Windows    LOCKS  ANT    POWER  INSTRUMENTS RELAY  THEFT HORN      heft System  Horn BLOWER Blower  ene INHIBIT RELAY  WINDOW Rear Window Defogger Ea SA hauls Parking Lamps  RADIO Radio System LUN ELAS Interior Light Controls    5 89       Engine Compartment Fuse Block    The engine compartment fuse block is located in the  engine compartment and protects all electrical   loads  See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12  for more information on location     For access to the main fuses  pull off the cover     CRUISE  CANCEL  RELAY       ija z  z   z   amp  2              9 4         j  3       HEATED  ENGINE  REAR BLOWER  CONT   RELAY WINDOW RELAY    AAELPUNP RELAY                         5 90    Fuses  INJ IGN  INJ IGN    ENG  SENSORS    AUTO TRANS  LH HEADLAMP    RH  HEADLAMP    ENG  CONT   BCM    FUEL PUMP  SPARE   RAD FAN 1 F L  BLOWER F L  MAIN F L  ENGINE F L  ABS F L  LIGHTING F L  RAD FAN 2 F L    REAR  WINDOW    SPARE  SPARE  T RELAX    Fuel Injectors and Ignition Modules  Fuel Injectors and Ignition Modules    Engine Sensors    Automatic Transmission  Left Headlamp    Right 
93. Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle  repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle   Limited Warranty  Although you may be required to  resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to  filing a court action  use of the program is free of  charge and your case will generally be heard within   40 days  If you do not agree with the decision given in  your case  you may reject it and proceed with any other  venue for relief available to you     You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the  toll free telephone number or write them at the  following address     BBB Auto Line Program   Council of Better Business Bureaus  Inc   4200 Wilson Boulevard   Suite 800   Arlington  VA 22203 1804    Telephone  1 800 955 5100    This program is available in all 50 states and the District  of Columbia  Eligibility is limited by vehicle age   mileage and other factors  General Motors reserves the  right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue  its participation in this program     Online Owner Center    The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership  needs  You can find your specific vehicle information  all in one place     The Owner Center allows you to     Get e mail service reminders       Access information about your specific vehicle   including tips and videos and an electronic  version of this owner   s manual   United States only       Keep track of your vehicle   s service history and  maintenance schedule       Find GM deale
94. D     NEXT W  Press this button to go to the previous radio  station and stay there    If a CD is playing  press and release this button   to go to the previous track  If more than one CD is    loaded  press and hold this button to take you to the  previous CD     MUTE  Press this button to silence the system  Press it  again  or any other radio button  to turn on the sound     A VOL  Volume   Press this button to increase  the volume     voL V  Volume   Press this button to decrease  the volume     3 53    Radio Reception  AM    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM   especially at night  The longer range  however  can  cause stations to interfere with each other  AM can pick  up noise from things like storms and power lines  Try  reducing the treble to reduce this noise     FM    FM stereo will give you the best sound  but FM signals  will reach only about 10 to 40 miles  16 to 65 km     Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals   causing the sound to come and go     3 54    Care of Your CDs    Handle CDs carefully  Store them in their original cases  or other protective cases and away from direct   sunlight and dust  If the surface of a CD is soiled   dampen a clean  soft cloth in a mild  neutral detergent  solution and clean it  wiping from the center to the edge     Be sure never to touch the side without writing when  handling CDs  Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges  or the edge of the hole and the outer edge     Care of Your CD Player  
95. Headlamp    Engine and BCM    Heated Rear Window    Throttle Relaxer Module       Relays   Usage _      Relays   Usage _    _    FUEL PUMP A C RELAY Air Conditioning  Fuel Pum  RELAY p HORN RELAY   Horn    FOG LAMP      CANCEL Fog Lamp Cancel BEEN RE Engine Cooling Fan 1  RELAY   FOG LAMP BRL EEN   RELAY Fog Lamp Sy aia Engine Cooling Fan 2    CRUISE ENGINE   CANCEL Cruise Control Cancel CONT  RELAY   Engine Controls   RELAY     HIGH BEAM HEATED REAR i   RELAY High Beam Headlamp Eg Rear Window Defogger   DAYTIME   COW BEAM START RELAY  RELAY Low Beam Headlamp       5 91    Capacities and Specifications    The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions   Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information     Capacities and Specifications    a  Application    r  g   me     100 125 Nm    All capacities are approximate  When adding  be sure to fill to the appropriate level  as recommended in this  manual  Recheck fluid level after filling       Engine Specifications     Engine Vin Code Spark Plug Gap  LS1 V8 Automatic Manual 0 040 inches  1 0 mm     Section 6 Maintenance Schedule       Maintenance Schedule                      0  ceeeeeeeeneees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services              ceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9  IMMFOGUCHON dicaccetcteciteocioeiatsimariditdteseecs ies  6 2 At Each  Fuel Fill ssciccisiserenocestsencvtrousenitvoenctiad 6 9  Maintenance Requirements       ncseerereeenenrennns 6 2 At Least Once a Month    
96. If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs   reimbursement  five days maximum  may be available  for the use of public transportation such as taxi or   bus  In addition  should you arrange transportation  through a friend or relative  reimbursement for  reasonable fuel expenses  five day maximum  may be  available  Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and  be supported by original receipts     Courtesy Rental Vehicle    Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy  rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle   you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair   Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of  30 a  day and must be supported by receipts  This requires  that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet  state  local and rental vehicle provider requirements   Requirements vary and may include minimum age  requirements  insurance coverage  credit card  etc  You  are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also   be responsible for taxes  levies  usage fees  excessive  mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of   the repair     Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a  courtesy rental     Additional Program Information    Courtesy Transportation is available during the  Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period  but it  s  not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty  A  separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner  Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle  provides detailed war
97. Safety Belt Comfort Guides                            1 1      1 23  Rear Seat Passenger Positions                     0608 1 20  Rear Seat Passengers  Safety Belts                    1 20  Rear Turn Signal  Stoplamps and Back Up  LAMPS  deisio nnen ia 5 49  Rear Window Defogger       esssscscscsesrerererernrersnne 3 21  Rearview Mirrors              0 0sceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 2 29  Reclining Seatbacks             ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 1 3  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants                   6 13  Recreational Vehicle Towing                s eeeeeeeeeeee 4 30  Remote Keyless Entry System                  eeeeeee ees 2 4  Remote Keyless Entry System  Operation              2 5    10    Remote Trunk Release               cs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 2 9  Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the   Spare Tire cecsceecasesederaeioenceelsieeedactgdeenyesices 5 73  Removing the Spare Tire and Tools                     5 72  Replacement Bulbs                  cceceeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 50  Replacing Brake System Parts                0 eeeeeee 5 40  Reporting Safety Defects   General Motors  2s i scceecevedecseeadesseseveeceecatects 7 10   United States Government               ceeeeeeeeee eee 7 10  REST REMINDER  siriene renser akse nan 2 34  Rest Remindet 542 a E 3 39  RESTORE TO FACTORY SETTINGS                  2 33  Restraint System Check   Checking Your Restraint Systems                   1  1 1  1   1 52   Replacing Restraint System Parts After   a 6  gt  Hz   e ee eee
98. See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 5     3 33    Daytime Running Lamps    Indicator Light    3 34    This light will illuminate  when the Daytime Running  Lamps  DRL  are  activated  See Exterior  Lamps on page 3 12     Service Vehicle Soon Light    The Service Vehicle Soon  message along with this  symbol will come on and a  chime will sound if it  detects a problem on the  vehicle     Such problems could be the Daytime Running  Lamps  DRL  or an automatic headlamp system  malfunction    If this happens  see your dealer as soon as possible     Fuel Gage    Your fuel gage tells you  about how much fuel you  have left  when the  ignition is on        When the indicator nears empty  the light will come on  and you will hear a chime  You still have a little fuel  left  but you should get more soon     Here are four things that some owners ask about  None  of these show a problem with your fuel gage     At the service station  the gas pump shuts off  before the gage reads full     It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the  gage indicated  For example  the gage may have  indicated the tank was half full  but it actually took a  little more or less than half the tank   s capacity to   fill the tank     The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner  or speed up     The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the  ignition     3 35    Trip Computer    The buttons for the trip  computer are located to  the right of the gages and  the display is located
99. THIS SEATING    POSITION    DOOR LOCK  UNLOCK    MASTER    N     ENGINE  LIGHTING   O   COOLANT    SWITCH    TURN  SIGNALS    PARKING  LAMPS    HAZARD  WARNING  FLASHER    DAYTIME  RUNNING  LAMPS    27o TEMP    BATTERY  CHARGING  SYSTEM    COOLANT    ENGINE OIL   PRESSURE    ANTI LOCK  BRAKES    ma    by tier          ENGINE    OWNER S  MANUAL  SERVICE    pume    SERVICE  gt    MANUAL A       4 NOTES    vi    Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems       Front Seats              ccccccececee eee nee eee eee een eeaeeneeneees 1 2 TOP Stra Paananen iiaa aaen aE mace 1 36  Power Seasons re opererer 1 2 Top Strap Anchor Location                 sssseeereree  1 37  Manual Lumbar isien e E 1 2 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for  Reclining SeatbatKSusnasiikenena ntenni 1 3 Children  LATCH System         u  u  ssseeererereee 1 38  Head    Restraints  ar taen aaa iets 1 4 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the  Seatback Latches            c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeee 1 4 LATCH System 2 00     ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 40   Safety Belt ssiciesacctiniiediasieesaviees i aiani 1 6 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat  Safety Belts  They Are for Everyone                  1 6 Position SEESKEESELEEEEEE SEEEELEESEEEKER Pree 1 40  Questions and Answers About Safety Belts        1 10 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front  How to Wear Safety Belts Properly                1  1 1     1 12 Seat  POSION meree ea ES eee 1 43  Driver POSION ar reen er rer eden 1 12 Air B
100. That will  clear the area around your front wheels  If your vehicle  has traction control  you should turn the system off   See Traction Control System  TCS  on page 4 8  Then  shift back and forth between REVERSE  R  and a  forward gear  spinning the wheels as little as possible   For a manual transmission  shift slowly between   either FIRST  1  or SECOND  2  and REVERSE  R    allowing the wheels to stop before shifting into   gear  Release the accelerator pedal while you shift  and  press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the  transmission is in gear  By slowly spinning your wheels  in the forward and reverse directions  you will cause   a rocking motion that may free your vehicle  If that does  not get you out after a few tries  you may need to be  towed out  If you do need to be towed out  see Towing  Your Vehicle on page 4 29     Towing    Towing Your Vehicle    Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if  you need to have your disabled vehicle towed  See  Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 5     If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle  for recreational purposes  such as behind a motorhome    see    Recreational Vehicle Towing    following     4 29    Recreational Vehicle Towing    Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle    behind another vehicle     such as behind a motorhome     The two most common types of recreational vehicle  towing are known as    dinghy towing     which is towing  your vehicle with all four wheels o
101. There is a front storage compartment located under the  audio system and a rear storage compartment located  at the rear of the center console  These storage  compartments can be replaced by your vehicle   s dealer   with an ashtray and cigarette lighter assembly     An open storage bin is also provided under the front  storage compartment        Center Console Storage Area    To open the armrest  storage area  pull up on  the latch at the front edge  of the lid     The storage area provides space to accommodate a  cellular phone charger which may be plugged into   the accessory power outlet located inside the console   See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3 17     2 31    Vehicle Personalization    Vehicle Personalization mode enables the driver to  customize some of the vehicle features using the trip  computer switch and instrument panel center display   Only features that are equipped on the vehicle will  be displayed     The following list shows features that can be reset or  customized     Restore To Factory Settings  Underspeed Chime  Distance To Arrival Display  Arrival Default   Trip Computer A and B  Stop Watch   Rest Reminder    2 32    Digital Speedometer  Radio Display  Confirmation Beeps  Speed Dependent Volume  Audio Distortion Limiter  Headlights Off Delay Time  Headlights Approach Time  Auto Headlights Sensitivity  Courtesy Lamp Timeout  Ignition Off Courtesy Lamp  Two Stage Unlock   Auto Lock In Drive  Automatic Transmission Only   Door Lock Indication    Ent
102. aaanes 5 5  Checking Things Under the Hood _                5 10  Bulb Replacement ou    cece eee ec eee eee ee ee ee ees 5 47  Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _          5 50  TeS    zatddedsrentaseccnadie  E I a sates 5 51  Appearance Care on  ee eeeeccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 5 78  Vehicle Identification oo    ccc cece eeeeeeaeeen es 5 86  Electrical System oo    eee ce ccc ee ee eee ee eee een es 5 87  Capacities and Specifications            eee 5 92   Maintenance Schedule             c0ccecsccesseesseesseeeees 6 1  Maintenance Schedule                   ccceceeeee ee neeee 6 2   Customer Assistance and Information                7 1  Customer Assistance and Information _            7 2  Reporting Safety Defects 1    7 10   ndek caie er aaa aa aa auch 1       Y    PONTIAC          GENERAL MOTORS  GM  the GM Emblem  PONTIAC   the PONTIAC Emblem and the name GTO are  registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation     This manual includes the latest information at the time it  was printed  We reserve the right to make changes  after that time without further notice     Please keep this manual in your vehicle  so it will be  there if you ever need it when you re on the road  If you  sell the vehicle  please leave this manual in it so the  new owner can use it     Part No  04GTO A First Edition    How to Use This Manual    Many people read their owner s manual from beginning  to end when they first receive their new vehicle  If   you do this  it will help you learn abo
103. ag Systems eee 1 46  Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy                    1 19 Where Are the Air Bags                 ceeeeeeeeeeeee es 1 48  Right Front Passenger Position                  000 1 20 When Should an Air Bag Inflate                  06  1 49  Rear Seat Passengers            ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eters 1 20 What Makes an Air Bag Inflate                  8  1 50  Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children How Does an Air Bag Restrain                  1 50   and Small Adults                 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eens 1 23 What Will You See After an Air  Safety Belt Pretensioners                 0 cceeeeeeeeees 1 25 Bag  Inflates   s2  giscisssveemn meddelere 1 50  Safety Belt Extender                 eeeseeeeeeeeeeee nents 1 25 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle           1 52   Child Restraints                eee esse ee newer eee 1 26 Restraint System Check                   c eee 1 52  Older Children sis nnanet 1 26 Checking Your Restraint Systems               00 1 52  Infants and Young Children                ceeeeeeee ees 1 28 Replacing Restraint System Parts After  Child Restraint Systems             c ceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 32 a Crash  sa sorger EE 1 53  Where to Put the Restraint                 eee 1 35    1 1    Front Seats    Power Seats    a    The power front seat controls are located on the  outboard side of the driver s and passenger   s seat     The horizontal switch is used to electrically adjust the  height  the tilt  and the movement of the seat 
104. ake  when leaving the vehicle  Never select PARK  P   while your vehicle is still moving     It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll     Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is  running unless you have to  If you have left the  engine running  the vehicle can move  suddenly  You or others could be injured  To  be sure your vehicle will not move  even when  you are on fairly level ground  always set your  parking brake and move the shift lever to  PARK  P   See Shifting Into Park  P  on   page 2 24  If you are pulling a trailer  see  Towing a Trailer on page 4 35        Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK  P  before starting  the engine  Your vehicle has an automatic transmission  shift lock control system  You must have your foot   on the regular brakes before you can shift from   PARK  P  when the ignition key is in ON  The vehicle  will not shift from PARK  P  if the button is pressed  before the brake is applied  If you cannot shift out   of PARK  P   ease pressure on the shift lever  push the  shift lever all the way into PARK  P   and release the  shift lever button as you maintain brake application   Then press the shift lever button and move the   shift lever into the desired gear  See Shifting Out of  Park  P  on page 2 26     REVERSE  R   Use this gear to back up  Never select  REVERSE  R  while your vehicle is still moving   Reverse lights will operate 
105. an Islands   Countries  Except Puerto Rico and U S  Virgin  Islands      Customer Assistance                   6006 7 4    Mirrors   Manual Rearview Mirror ccecce 2 29   Outside Convex Mirror             ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 2 30   Outside Power Mirrors sinsir siteisiin nina 2 29  MYGMLINK  COM ssia anasa iiie 7 3  Navigating the Menu     sssscnsiesrnerrnrrerenrrerenn 2 33  New Vehicle Break In                  cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 15  Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts              6 15  Odo Meter seven seseediaesseetdegeeteinc eeteleaaere tina 3 36  Off Road Recovery     W  u  sssseeeeeeererere renerne rene 4 11  Oil   Change Engine Oil Light      W   sssseeeeeerrrere 3 33   ENGINE oscau chvanvicnsate sens se ere beregnere mer 5 13   Pressure  Light sr eee de SE 3 32  Older Children  Restraints            sssssseereree 1 26  One to Four Shift Light  Manual Transmission       2 22  Online Owner Center              ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 7 3  Operation sorsien aias oanien iren e Eea 3 19  Operation Tips  serene sene ieee 3 22  Options Menu               ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 49  O SPEED  Overspeed              ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen trees 3 38  O Speed P2  Overspeed Presets               0 eeeeees 3 38  Other Warning Devices                eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 4    Outlet Adjustment                  cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22  Outside    GOnvex  MINOT rarse a E st 2 30  Power Mirrors             ccccccecceceeeeneeeteeseneeaeenes 2 29  O
106. and replacement parts     5 86    Service Parts Identification Label    You ll find this label on your spare tire cover  It   s very  helpful if you ever need to order parts  On this label  you  will find the following     e VIN    Model designation    Paint information      A list of all production options and special  equipment     Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle     Electrical System    Add On Electrical Equipment    Notice  Don   t add anything electrical to your  vehicle unless you check with your dealer first   Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle  and the damage wouldn   t be covered by your  warranty  Some add on elecirical equipment can  keep other components from working as they  should     Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting  to add anything electrical to your vehicle  see  Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 52     Fuses and Circuit Breakers    The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  short circuits by fuses  circuit breakers and thermal links  in the wiring itself  This greatly reduces the chance of  fires caused by electrical problems     Look at the metallic band inside the fuse  If the band is  broken or melted  replace the fuse  Be sure you  replace a bad fuse with a new one of the correct size     If you ever have a problem on the road and don   t have a  spare fuse  you can borrow one  Just pick some   feature of your vehicle that you can get along   without     like the rad
107. anel so  that the locating pegs on the side of the lamp  assembly snap free from the clips     4  While holding the assembly  turn the appropriate  bulb holder counterclockwise to release it from the  housing     5  Remove the bulb from the holder by pushing it in  and turning it counterclockwise  The turn signal  bulb must have amber colored glass     6  Install the new bulb into the bulb holder by pushing  it into the holder and turning it clockwise     7  Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and install  the bulb holder into the lamp housing  ensuring that  the holder locks securely into place     8  Ensure that the lamp assembly clips are seated  correctly  Fit the housing to the body  ensuring  that the locating pegs snap into the clips and install  and tighten the attaching nuts to the correct  torque     9  Check the light operation     5 50       Replacement Bulbs    Exterior Lamp Bulb Number  Back up Lamp 1156  Front Sidemarker Lamp 168s    Front Turn Signal and  Parking Lamp SYNA    168  Headlamps  High Beam H9    Windshield Wiper Blade  Replacement    Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least  twice a year for wear or cracking  See Owner Checks  and Services on page 6 9 for more information    To replace the wiper blade assembly     1  Lift the wiper up from the windshield and set into  the vertically locked position     2  Press the tab that holds the wiper blade to the arm   3  Slide the blade down and off the arm   4  Slide in the new blade and sn
108. ap into place     Tires    Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by  a leading tire manufacturer  If you ever have questions  about your tire warranty and where to obtain service   see your GM Warranty booklet for details  For additional  information refer to the tire manufacturer   s booklet  included with your vehicle   s Owner   s Manual     Poorly maintained and improperly used tires  are dangerous     e Overloading your tires can cause  overheating as a result of too much  friction  You could have an air out and a  serious accident  See    Loading Your  Vehicle    in the Index    Underinflated tires pose the same danger  as overloaded tires  The resulting accident  could cause serious injury  Check all tires  frequently to maintain the recommended  pressure  Tire pressure should be checked  when your tires are cold     CAUTION      Continued        e Overinflated tires are more likely to be  cut  punctured or broken by a sudden    impact     such as when you hit a pothole   Keep tires at the recommended pressure   Worn  old tires can cause accidents  If  your tread is badly worn  or if your tires  have been damaged  replace them        Notice  If your vehicle has low profile tires  they  are more susceptible to damage from road hazards  or curb impact than standard profile tires  Tire   and or wheel assembly damage can occur when  coming into contact with road hazards like  potholes  or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a   curb  Your GM warranty doe
109. ards  the direction of the steering column     To set cruise control  do the following   1  Turn on the ignition     2  Press the ON OFF CANCEL switch  The cruise  control symbol along with the Cruise Enabled  message appears on the trip computer display     3  Get up to the speed you want     4  Rotate the lever down to the SET DECEL position   The cruise control symbol along with the CRUISE  ACTIVE message appears on the display    5  Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and release  the cruise control lever     Increasing Speed While Using Cruise  Control    You may do one of the following       Turn the lever down to the SET DECEL position  until the car slows down to the desired speed   then release it       Turn the lever up to the RES ACCEL position until  the car accelerates up to the desired speed  then  release it     Minor changes in speed can be achieved by  momentarily turning the lever up or down  When  reducing speed  remember that the cruise control is not  designed to operate under 25 mph  40 km h      Pausing Cruise Control    To pause cruise control  press the brake pedal on  automatic transmissions or the clutch pedal on  manual transmissions  or press the ON OFF CANCEL  switch once     This deactivates the cruise control but retains the speed  in its memory  The CRUISE ACTIVE message and  cruise control symbol on the display will turn off    To regain the memory speed momentarily  turn the lever  up to the RES ACCEL position  provided you are  travell
110. ation of the  engine oil fill cap     E7    SAE 5W 30    AR    Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in  the proper operating range in the cross hatched area   Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are  through     What Kind of Engine Oil to Use    Look for two things   e GM6094M    Your vehicle   s engine requires oil meeting GM  Standard GM6094M  You should look for and use  only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M     Ud    RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS SAE 5W 30    As shown in the viscosity chart  SAE 5W 30 is best  for your vehicle  However  if it is going to be 0  F    18  C  or above and SAE 5W 30 is not available     LOOK FOR you may use SAE 10W 30   HOT Hra These numbers on an oil container show its    WEATHER STANDARD viscosity  or thickness  Do not use other viscosity    GM 6094M oils such as SAE 20W 50   Oils meeting these  requirements should also  have the starburst  symbol on the container   This symbol indicates  that the oil has been  certified by the American  Petroleum Institute  API      ee SAE 10W 30  ACCEPTABLE       IF 5W 30 IS NOT  SAE 5W 30 AVAILABLE  RECOMMENDED You should look for this information on the oil container   and use only those oils that are identified as meeting  COLD GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol  WEATHER on the front of the oil container     DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40  SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER  VISCOSITY GRADE OIL  NOT RECOMMENDED       Notice  Use only engine oil identified as meet
111. ay need new LATCH system parts     If belts are cut or damaged  replace them  Collision  damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH  system  safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced   New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt  or LATCH system was not being used at the time of   the collision     If an air bag inflates  you will need to replace air bag  system parts  See the part on the air bag system earlier  in this section     If the frontal air bags inflate  you will also need to  replace the driver   s and right front passenger   s safety  belt buckle assembly  Be sure to do so  Then the   new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in  a collision     After a crash you may need to replace the driver and  front passenger   s safety belt buckle assemblies  even if  the frontal air bags have not deployed  The driver   and front passenger s safety belt buckle assemblies  contain the safety belt pretensioners  Have your safety  belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been   in a collision  or if your air bag readiness light stays on  after you start your vehicle or while you are driving   See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3 26     1 53    4 NOTES    1 54    Section 2 Features and Controls       IGS  ecccied eacmateceeacoee  A A E 2 2 Automatic Transmission Operation                 6 2 18  Remote Keyless Entry System                  0   ees 2 4 Manual Transmission Operation                   205 2 21  Remote Keyless Entry System O
112. ays leave enough room up ahead to stop  even  though you have anti lock brakes     Using Anti Lock    Do not pump the brakes  Just hold the brake pedal  down firmly and let anti lock work for you  You may hear  the anti lock pump or motor operate  and feel the   brake pedal pulsate  but this is normal     Braking in Emergencies    With anti lock  you can steer and brake at the same  time  In many emergencies  steering can help you more  than even the very best braking     Traction Control System  TCS     Your vehicle has a Traction Control System  TCS  that  limits wheel spin  This is especially useful in slippery  road conditions  The system operates only if it senses  that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or  beginning to lose traction  When this happens    the system reduces engine power and applies the  brakes  as necessary     Traction control helps you to keep control of the vehicle  and reminds you to match your speed to the road  conditions  In addition  traction control when activated   provides feedback to the driver by pulsing the  accelerator pedal     You may feel or hear the system working  but this is  normal  The TCS is automatically turned on whenever  the ignition is turned from off to on  A Low Traction  message is displayed on the trip computer  indicating  traction control is limiting wheel spin  until the MODE  button on the trip computer is pressed  The message  then goes back to the original trip computer display with  a small low traction s
113. battery  This will help keep your battery from  running down     Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas    that can explode  You can be badly hurt if you  are not careful  See Jump Siarting on   page 5 42 for tips on working around a battery  without getting hurt        Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your  vehicle for longer storage periods     5 41    Jump Starting    If your battery has run down  you may want to use  another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your    vehicle  Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely     Batteries can hurt you  They can be dangerous  because     They contain acid that can burn you       They contain gas that can explode  or ignite      They contain enough electricity to  burn you     If you do not follow these steps exactly  some  or all of these things can hurt you     5 42       Notice  Ignoring these steps could result in costly  damage to your vehicle that would not be covered  by your warranty     Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it  will not work  and it could damage your vehicle     1  Check the other vehicle  It must have a 12 volt  battery with a negative ground system  Remove  any battery covers     Notice  If the other vehicle   s system is not a 12 volt  system with a negative ground  both vehicles can  be damaged  Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems  with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle     2  Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  can reach  but be 
114. ble or disable the audio  system confirmation beeps function  This function is  explained further in the audio section  The audio system  option level fitted to your vehicle determines the   menu choices available  Use the up or down arrows to  select    On    or Off  Beeps On  CD Load  amp  Eject Only  or Beeps Off  If On is selected  the audio system  confirmation beeps function is activated  the default is  On  Press the MODE button to continue  See Radio  with Six Disc CD on page 3 43  The default selection  is On     SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME    This option is used to enable or disable the audio  system speed dependent volume function  This function  is explained further in the audio section  Use the up   or down arrows to adjust the setting to Off  1  2  3  4 or  Max  the default is 2  Press the MODE button to  continue  See Radio with Six Disc CD on page 3 43   The default selection is 2     AUDIO DISTORTION LIMITER    This option is used to enable or disable the audio  system distortion limiting function  This function is  explained further in the audio section  Use the up or  down arrows to select On or Off  If On is selected  the  audio distortion limiting function is activated  the  default is On  Press the MODE button to continue   See Radio with Six Disc CD on page 3 43  The default  selection is On     2 35    HEADLIGHTS OFF DELAY TIME    This option is used to adjust the headlights off time  delay  Use the up or down arrows to adjust the delay  setting between zer
115. bricant    SAE 80W 140 Synthetic Axle Multi Purpose Lubricant  Superlube  Lubricant  GM Part No  89021809   a mg  GM Part No  U S  12346241  in  anada    Hood Latch      Dielectric Silicone Grease    Assembly  Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Weatherstrip    Secondary  GM Part No  U S  12346293  in Conditionin  GM Part No  U S  12345579  in  Latch  Pivots   Canada 992723  or lubricant 9  Canada 992887    Spring Anchor   meeting requirements of NLGI  2   and Release   Category LB or GC LB   Pawl       Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts    Replacement parts identified below by name  part number  or specification can be obtained from your dealer     ACDelco      Engine Air Cleaner Filter 92082656  n    Engine Oil Filter 88984215 PF 46  Spark Plugs 12571164 41 985       Engine Drive Belt Routing       Power Steering Generator Belt Routing    Maintenance Record    After the scheduled services are performed  record the date  odometer reading  who performed the service and the  type of services performed in the boxes provided  See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 in this section    Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record  pages  Also  you should retain all maintenance receipts     Maintenance Record    Odometer 3 Maintenance I or       6 17    Maintenance Record  cont   d     Odometer R Maintenance I or         Section 7  Customer Assistance and Information                 7 2  Customer Satisfaction Procedure      
116. cal condition  alertness  coordination  and eyesight all play a part  So do alcohol  drugs and  frustration  But even in 3 4 of a second  a vehicle moving  at 60 mph  100 km h  travels 66 feet  20 m   That   could be a lot of distance in an emergency  so keeping  enough space between your vehicle and others is  important     And  of course  actual stopping distances vary greatly  with the surface of the road  whether it is pavement  or gravel   the condition of the road  wet  dry  icy   tire  tread  the condition of your brakes  the weight of   the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied     Avoid needless heavy braking  Some people drive   in spurts     heavy acceleration followed by heavy  braking     rather than keeping pace with traffic  This is  a mistake  Your brakes may not have time to cool  between hard stops  Your brakes will wear out much  faster if you do a lot of heavy braking  If you keep pace  with the traffic and allow realistic following distances   you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking    That means better braking and longer brake life     If your engine ever stops while you are driving  brake  normally but do not pump your brakes  If you do    the pedal may get harder to push down  If your engine  stops  you will still have some power brake assist    But you will use it when you brake  Once the power  assist is used up  it may take longer to stop and   the brake pedal will be harder to push        Anti lock Brake System  ABS     Your vehicle
117. can lose air after a time   Check the inflation pressure regularly  It should be   60 psi  420 kPa      After installing the compact spare on your vehicle  you  should stop as soon as possible and make sure   your spare tire is correctly inflated  The compact spare  is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph    105 km h  for distances up to 3 000 miles  5 000 km    so you can finish your trip and have your full size   tire repaired or replaced where you want  Of course  it   s  best to replace your spare with a full size tire as   soon as you can  Your spare will last longer and be in  good shape in case you need it again     5 77    Notice  When the compact spare is installed  don   t  take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  with guide rails  The compact spare can get caught  on the rails  That can damage the tire and wheel   and maybe other parts of your vehicle     Don   t use your compact spare on other vehicles     And don   t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with  other wheels or tires  They won t fit  Keep your compact  spare tire and its wheel together     Notice  Tire chains won t fit your compact spare   Using them can damage your vehicle and can  damage the chains too  Don   t use tire chains on  your compact spare     5 78    Appearance Care    Remember  cleaning products can be hazardous  Some  are toxic  Others can burst into flames if you strike a  match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle  Some are  dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
118. carried away  As little as six inches of  flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle   If this happens  you and other vehicle  occupants could drown  Do not ignore police  warning signs  and otherwise be very cautious  about trying to drive through flowing water        Some Other Rainy Weather Tips    Besides slowing down  allow some extra following  distance  And be especially careful when you  pass another vehicle  Allow yourself more clear  room ahead  and be prepared to have your   view restricted by road spray     Have good tires with proper tread depth  See Tires  on page 5 51     City Driving       One of the biggest problems with city streets is the  amount of traffic on them  You will want to watch out for  what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to  traffic signals     Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving     Know the best way to get to where you are   going  Get a city map and plan your trip into   an unknown part of the city just as you would for a  cross country trip     Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross  most large cities  You will save time and energy   See Freeway Driving on page 4 20     Treat a green light as a warning signal  A traffic  light is there because the corner is busy enough   to need it  When a light turns green  and just before  you start to move  check both ways for vehicles  that have not cleared the intersection or may   be running the red light     4 19    Freeway Driving       Mile for mile  fre
119. cceeeeceeeeeeeee neneiia 2 22  Shifting Into Park  P  22 25 okse eee eeeeeaes 2 24  Shifting Out of Park  P  egaine aia 2 26  Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster                  eeeeeee 1 14  SHIAGING ercsi nit ca veere saviewee a 4 14    11    Some Other Rainy Weather Tips                    0 4 18    Special Fabric Cleaning Problems                  06 5 80  Specifications  Capacities               eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 92  SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME               2  0  005 2 35  Speedometer             cece eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeaeeaeeaeeaes 3 25  Starting Your Engine sesruro earn 2 17  SLCC 3 tas E EPE ES T E T E 4 9  Steering in Emergencies                  sceeeeeeneeeeenes 4 10  Steeno TPS  sereine a a on i 4 9  Steering Wheel Controls  Audio                   0 000 3 53  Steering Wheel  Tilt Wheel                      ceeeeeeeeeee 3 5  STOP WATCH           0  00cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeees 2 34  Stop  Watch tuissscecss raden en 3 39  Storage Areas  Center Console Storage Area              0 eeeeeeee 2 31  Cupholder S  aise nsvteessenserea detonerede 2 31  Front Storage Area        ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneee een eee es 2 31  GIOVE  BOX  s d2ecidsevecs  sioa re E EEE Eeri 2 30  Storing the Flat Tire and Tools                 0c eeeeees 5 77  Storing the Spare Tire and Tools                 2 0006 5 77  Stuck in Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow              0 eee 4 28  SUI Vis os 52 oa ond oerein iriri 2 12  Tachomelei sree a re eee 3 25  Telescopic Steering Column       W u  u  ssseeeee
120. ce  Do not leave the  security card in your glovebox  The PIN should also   be written down and kept with other important  documents     If your security card is lost and the PIN is not recorded   the PIN can be requested from your dealer  after  supplying proof of ownership  There may be a charge  for this service     When the radio and vehicle are turned off  the blinking  red light indicates that your radio is armed     3 52    Security Release Procedure    To type in your PIN code  do the following   1  Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY     2  Turn the radio on  CODE __  display     3  Use the preset buttons to enter the PIN code     _ will appear on the    If the wrong PIN code is entered  the radio will display  CODE ERR WAIT     After a few seconds  the radio will display  CODE 2__ __  indicating that this is the second  attempt  The correct code should now be entered   After three attempts  the radio will display   LOCK OUT 1 HR  After 1 hour  the radio will allow    another three attempts to enter the PIN     Audio Steering Wheel Controls    If your vehicle has this feature  you can control certain  radio functions using the buttons on your steering  wheel        MODE  Press this button to switch between FM1  FM2   AM  or CD     A NEXT  Press this button to go to the next radio  station and stay there     If a CD is playing  press and release this button to  advance to the next track  If more than one CD   is loaded  press and hold this button to take you to the  next C
121. ce test     This light should come on  as a check to show you it is  working  when the ignition is on and the engine is   not running  If the light does not come on  have it  repaired  This light will also come on during a  malfunction in one of two ways       Light Flashing     A misfire condition has been  detected  A misfire increases vehicle emissions  and may damage the emission control system on  your vehicle  Diagnosis and service may be  required       Light On Steady     An emission control system  malfunction has been detected on your vehicle   Diagnosis and service may be required     3 29    If the Light is Flashing    The following may prevent more serious damage to  your vehicle       Reducing vehicle speed   e Avoiding hard accelerations   e Avoiding steep uphill grades   e If you are towing a trailer  reduce the amount of  cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible   If the light stops flashing and remains on steady  see    If  the Light Is On Steady    following     If the light continues to flash  when it is safe to do so   stop the vehicle  Find a safe place to park your vehicle   Turn the key off  wait at least 10 seconds and restart  the engine  If the light remains on steady  see    If   the Light Is On Steady    following  If the light is still  flashing  follow the previous steps  and see your dealer  for service as soon as possible     3 30    If the Light Is On Steady    You may be able to correct the emission system  malfunction by considering the
122. ck   The level should never read over the HOT mark  so be  careful not to add too much  It doesn   t take much   fluid  generally less than 0 6 pints  0 3 L   Don   t overfill     5 22    Notice  We recommend you use only fluid labeled  DEXRON    IIl  because fluid with that label is   made especially for your automatic transmission   Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON    III is  not covered by your new vehicle warranty       After adding fluid  recheck the fluid level as  described under    How to Check       e When the correct fluid level is obtained  push the  dipstick back in all the way   Remember to always replace the dipstick and lock  the handle down      If fluid has to be added often  there may be a    problem or leak and you should see your vehicle  dealer     Manual Transmission Fluid  When to Check    A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is  changed  However  the fluid in your manual transmission  doesn t require changing     How to Check    Because this operation can be difficult  you may choose  to have this done at your dealership service department     If you do it yourself  be sure to follow all the instructions  here  or you could get a false reading     Notice  Too much or too little fluid can damage  your transmission  Too much can mean that some  of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine  part or exhaust system parts  starting a fire    Too little fluid could cause the transmission to  overheat  Be sure to get an accurate 
123. cle  See the earlier Caution under  Engine Exhaust on page 2 27     Also  idling in a closed in place can let deadly    carbon monoxide  CO  into your vehicle even if  the climate control fan is at the highest setting   One place this can happen is a garage   Exhaust     with CO     can come in easily   NEVER park in a garage with the engine  running     Another closed in place can be a blizzard   See Winter Driving on page 4 24     2 28       It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle  if the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with  the parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can  roll  Do not leave your vehicle when the engine    is running unless you have to  If you have left  the engine running  the vehicle can move  suddenly  You or others could be injured    To be sure your vehicle will not move  even  when you are on fairly level ground  always  set your parking brake and move the shift  lever to PARK  P         Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not  move  See Shifting Into Park  P  on page 2 24     Mirrors    Manual Rearview Mirror    The mirror can be adjusted two ways  First  to adjust  the height of the mirror  adjust the arm that connects the  mirror to the windshield  Second  adjust the angle of   the mirror by moving the mirror to a position that allows  you to see out of the back window     To reduce glare from headlamps behind you  move the  lever toward you to the night position  To return the  mirror to the daytime position  move the 
124. cnictedt sedatuinaedochaas nen 3 2    Instrument Panel Brightness                 ceeeeeeeeee 3 15  Instrument Panel Fuse Block ccecce 5 88  Interior Lamp ss ur daer ae teed hts 3 15  JUMP Starting arrene ninaninata 5 42  Key REMOVAll vopnin in 2 26  Keyless Entry System siirinsesi 2 4  Key Sarama aae a e N a a 2 2    Lamps   EXIEnNOr omarr E tenets 3 12   MENON aoaea aaa a E a a a aE 3 15  Lap Shoulder Belt               cceeeeeeeeeeeeee reas 1 12  1 21  LATCH System   Child  Restraints  ccvccc cccccedscsdevvencasvvevediessectins 1 38   Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the   LATCH System              cceceeeseseeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 1 40   Latches  Seatback              cccccceceeeeeeeee seen eaeaeaenes 1 4    Leaving Your Vehicle                eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7  Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine  RUNNING rn nr era 2 25  Light  Air Bag Readiness             sseseeereree seen rrrnrnses 3 26  Anti Lock Brake System Warning                   1 1 1         3 28  Brake System Warning        sssseeeererererreree 3 27  Change Engine Qil 252 he arrest 3 33  Charging System 5 222 664 4508 sele treer inii base bes 3 27  Daytime Running Lamps Indicator                    3 34  FOG LAMP  serieen n ieee 3 33  Highbeam ON          cceeeeceeeeee eee abe ete eeneee ees 3 33  Malfunction Indicator siessen 3 29  OM IPKESSUPE  saas ses ES RES 3 32  Safety Belt Reminder                  eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 25  SCCUNLY serinin saas tE aS EE Eria 3 33  Service Vehicle SOON      
125. could be low on oil  or could have  some other oil problem  Have it fixed immediately     When the ignition is on but the engine is not running   the light will come on as a test to show you it is working   but the light will go out when the engine is running  If   it doesn   t come on with the ignition on  you may have a  problem with the bulb  Have it fixed right away     3 32    Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low  If    you do  your engine can become so hot that it  catches fire  You or others could be burned   Check your oil as soon as possible and have  your vehicle serviced        Notice  Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may  damage the engine  The repairs would not be  covered by your warranty  Always follow the  maintenance schedule in this manual for changing  engine oil     Change Engine Oil Light    If the Service Engine Oil  message in the trip  computer is displayed  along with this symbol after  you start the engine  it  means that service   is required for your vehicle     See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine  Oil on page 5 13 for more information     Security Light    fi    This light flashes when the  vehicle security system is  activated     Fog Lamp Light  This light will come on    when the fog lamps are  in use     20    The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off   See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12 for more information     Highbeam On Light    This light will illuminate  when the headlamp high  beams are in use     
126. cover   2  Remove the radiator cover     A hole is provided in the air intake duct through  which the bulbs can be accessed     5 47    4  Remove the old bulb  by twisting the bulb  counterclockwise     After replacing the bulbs  remember to reinstall the  radiator cover and the four screws     1  Open the hood  Access the bulbs by following the  previous instructions     2  Turn the dust caps  counterclockwise and  remove from the rear of  the headlamp  assembly to gain  access to the bulb        5  Carefully without touching it  install the new bulb by  reversing Steps 1 through 4        6  Check the light operation     3  Remove the wiring harness connector by squeezing  the two tabs on the connector and pulling the  connector down     5 48    Front Turn Signal and Parking  Lamps    1     Open the hood  To access the bulbs  see  Headlamps on page 5 47       Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the    headlamp assembly       Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove     4  Lightly press the bulb and twist counterclockwise    out of the holder       Insert the new bulb and install the bulb holder     The bulb should be colored orange       Connect the wiring harness connector     See Headlamps on page 5 47 to replace bulb    assembly       Check light operation     Rear Turn Signal  Stoplamps and  Back Up Lamps    1  Open the trunk        2  Remove the two screws that attach the taillamp  assembly to the vehicle     3  Pull the assembly sideways out from the p
127. d    To check the fluid level  look at the markings on the  reservoir  If the fluid level is between the MIN and the  MAX line  the fluid level is correct  See Engine  Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more  information on location  If the fluid level is between  these marks do not remove the cap  as the fluid   will quickly absorb moisture     If fluid does need to be added  first turn the vehicle off   Remove the cap and add the proper fluid  Remember  to replace the cap and clean up any spilled fluid     Engine Coolant    The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  DEX COOL   engine coolant  This coolant is designed  to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles   240 000 km   whichever occurs first  if you add   only DEX COOL   extended life coolant     The following explains your cooling system and how to  add coolant when it is low  If you have a problem   with engine overheating  see Engine Overheating on  page 5 28     A 50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable water and  DEX COOL   coolant will do the following     e Give freezing protection down to  34  F   37  C     Give boiling protection up to 265  F  129  C      Protect against rust and corrosion     Help keep the proper engine temperature      Let the warning lights and gages work as they  should    Notice  Using coolant other than DEX COOL   may  cause premature engine  heater core or radiator  corrosion  In addition  the engine coolant may  require changing sooner  at 30 000 miles  50 000 km   or
128. d  exhaust system even though they have corrosion  protection     At least every spring  flush these materials from the  underbody with plain water  Clean any areas where mud  and debris can collect  Dirt packed in close areas of   the frame should be loosened before being flushed   Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can  do this for you     Chemical Paint Spotting    Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  chemical fallout  Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  attack painted surfaces on your vehicle  This damage  can take two forms  blotchy  ring shaped discolorations   and small  irregular dark spots etched into the paint  surface     Although no defect in the paint job causes this  GM will  repair  at no charge to the owner  the surfaces of   new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  12 months or 12 000 miles  20 000 km  of purchase   whichever occurs first     Vehicle Care Appearance Materials    See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing    the following products   Description    Polishing Cloth  Wax Treated    Tar and Road Oil  Remover    Chrome Cleaner and  Polish    White Sidewall Tire  Cleaner    Vinyl Cleaner    Glass Cleaner    Chrome and Wire Wheel  Cleaner    Finish Enhancer    Interior and exterior  polishing cloth     Removes tar  road oil and  asphalt    Use on chrome or  stainless steel     Removes soil and black  marks from whitewalls     Cleans vinyl tops   upholstery and  convertible tops     Removes dirt
129. d size of tires you need  look at  the Tire and Loading Information label  For more    information about this label and where to find it  see If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle  the  Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30  wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  Make sure the replacements are the same size  many miles of driving  A tire and or wheel  load capacity  speed rating and construction type could fail suddenly  causing a crash  Use only     bias  bias belted or radial  as your original tires  radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle        Mixing tires could cause you to lose control  while driving  If you mix tires of different sizes  or types  radial and bias belted tires   the  vehicle may not handle properly  and you    could have a crash  Using tires of different  sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle   Be sure to use the same size and type tires on  all wheels  It   s all right to drive with your  compact spare temporarily  it was developed  for use on your vehicle  See    Compact Spare  Tire    in the index        5 65    Uniform Tire Quality Grading    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  selection width  For example     Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A    The following information relates to the system  developed by the Unites States National Highway Traffic  Safety Administration  which grades tires by treadwear   traction and temperature performance   This applie
130. dd on  child restraint system is a portable one  which   is purchased by the vehicle   s owner     For many years  add on child restraints have used  the adult belt system in the vehicle  To help   reduce the chance of injury  the child also has to  be secured within the restraint  The vehicle   s   belt system secures the add on child restraint in the  vehicle  and the add on child restraint   s harness  system holds the child in place within the restraint     One system  the three point harness  has straps  that come down over each of the infants shoulders  and buckle together at the crotch  The five point  harness system has two shoulder straps  two hip  straps and a crotch strap  A shield may take   the place of hip straps     1 34    A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are  attached to a flat pad which rests low against the  child   s body  A shelf  or armrest type shield   has straps that are attached to a wide  shelf like  shield that swings up or to the side     When choosing a child restraint  be sure the child  restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle  If it is  it  will have a label saying that it meets federal motor  vehicle safety standards     Then follow the instructions for the restraint  You may  find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a  booklet  or both  These restraints use the belt system or  the LATCH system in your vehicle  but the child also  has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the  chance of personal injury 
131. der Exterior Lamps on page 3 12    Climate Controls  See Climate Control System on  page 3 19    Audio System Controls  See Audio System s  on  page 3 42    Passenger s Air Bag  See Where Are the Air Bags   on page 1 48     L     M     z    AnDO DVO     lt C    Cruise Control Lever  See    Cruise Control    under  Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 5     Audio Steering Wheel Controls  See Audio Steering  Wheel  Controls on page 3 53     Driver s Air Bag  See Where Are the Air Bags  on  page 1 48    Tilt Wheel  See Tilt Wheel on page 3 5    Horn  See Horn on page 3 4    Ignition Switch  See Ignition Positions on page 2 16   Shift Lever  See Shifting Into Park  P  on page 2 24   Cupholders  See Cupholder s  on page 2 31     Power Window Switches  See Power Windows on  page 2 11     Parking Brake  See Parking Brake on page 2 23   Glovebox  See Glove Box on page 2 30     Hazard Warning Flashers    Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others  They  also let police know you have a problem  Your front  and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off     The hazard warning  flasher button is located  near the center of the  instrument panel        Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what  position your key is in  and even if the key isn   t in     Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal  lamps flash on and off  Press the button again to  turn the flashers off     When the hazard warning flashers are on  your turn  signals won   t work     Other Wa
132. dropping   back  And if something happens to cause you to  cancel your pass  you need only slow down   and drop back again and wait for another  opportunity     If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle   wait your turn  But take care that someone is not  trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow  vehicle  Remember to glance over your shoulder  and check the blind spot     Check your mirrors  glance over your shoulder  and  start your left lane change signal before moving out  of the right lane to pass  When you are far   enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front  in your inside mirror  activate your right lane  change signal and move back into the right lane    Remember that your right outside mirror is convex   The vehicle you just passed may seem to be  farther away from you than it really is      Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on  two lane roads  Reconsider before passing the  next vehicle     Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly     Even though the brake lamps are not flashing  it  may be slowing down or starting to turn     If you are being passed  make it easy for the  following driver to get ahead of you  Perhaps  you can ease a little to the right     Loss of Control    Let us review what driving experts say about what  happens when the three control systems  brakes   steering and acceleration  do not have enough friction  where the tires meet the road to do what the driver  has asked     In any emergenc
133. e alarm  but leaves the alarm  system on and undisturbed  Closing the trunk re arms  the trunk alarm after a short delay     The LOCK button on the key will not function when the  ignition is turned ON or the driver   s door is open     Disarming the System    To disarm the system  press UNLOCK on the key or  turn the ignition to ON     How to Detect a Tamper Condition    The exterior turn signals should flash twice when  returning to your vehicle and pressing UNLOCK on the  key  If they flash three times  an attempted break in  has occurred while the vehicle was armed  If you wish  to find out what set the alarm off  turn the ignition on  and look at the trip computer display for the ALARM  ACTIVATED message being shown  The ALARM  ACTIVATED message will be displayed first for   one second  followed by the trigger point screens    The trigger point screens will also be displayed for  one second  If more than one trigger point has been  activated  the display will show each trigger point screen  in sequence for one second  returning back to the  ALARM ACTIVATED screen  The alarm screens will be  shown in a continuous cycle until the trip computer  MODE button is pressed  The center display then  reverts to the last screen shown prior to the ignition  being off     The possible trigger points are the following     The hood has been opened     The trunk has been opened     One of the doors has been opened       Hot wiring of the vehicle was attempted   ignition on without key i
134. e ignition on   2  Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds     3 46    3  Wait for LOAD ALL to appear on the display  the  light located to the left of the slot to flash  and for  the radio to produce a beep  if beeps are turned on   See    Confirmation Beeps    later in this section for  information about turning beeps on  and off     4  Once the light stops flashing and turns green  load  a CD  Insert the CD partway into the slot  label side  up  The player will pull the CD in     Once the CD is loaded  the light will begin flashing  again  Once the light stops flashing and turns  green  you can load another CD  The CD player  takes up to six CDs  Do not try to load more   than six     To load more than one CD but less than six  complete  Steps 1 through 3  When you have finished loading  CDs  with the radio on or off  press the EJECT button to  cancel the loading function  The radio will begin to   play the last CD loaded     When a CD is inserted  the CD number will appear in  the CD symbol on the display  If more than one CD has  been loaded  a number for each CD will be displayed    If you select an equalization setting for your CD  it will be  activated each time you play a CD     Whether the radio is on or off  the last CD loaded will  begin to play automatically     As each new track starts to play  the track number will  appear on the display     For every CD loaded  a number will appear on the  display  To play a specific CD  press the numbered  pushbutton t
135. e in the vehicle  Be sure to properly secure   any child restraint in your vehicle     even when no child  is in it     1 35    Top Strap    Some child restraints have a top strap  or    top tether     It  can help restrain the child restraint during a collision   For it to work  a top strap must be properly anchored to  the vehicle  Some top strap equipped child restraints  are designed for use with or without the top strap being  anchored  Others require the top strap always to be  anchored  Be sure to read and follow the instructions for  your child restraint  If yours requires that the top strap  be anchored  don t use the restraint unless it is anchored  properly    If the child restraint does not have a top strap  one can  be obtained  in kit form  for many child restraints    Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit  is available     1 36       In Canada  the law requires that forward facing child  restraints have a top strap  and that the strap be  anchored  In the United States  some child restraints  also have a top strap  If your child restraint has a  top strap  it should be anchored     Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top  Strap Anchor Location on page 1 37  Be sure to use   an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle  as the seating position where the child restraint will   be placed     Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor  only one child restraint  Attaching more than  one child restraint to a single b
136. e the flat tire     5 74    7  Remove any rust or dirt  from the wheel bolts   mounting surfaces  and  spare wheel        Rust or dirt on the wheel  or on the parts to  which it is fastened  can make the wheel nuts  become loose after a time  The wheel could  come off and cause an accident  When you    change a wheel  remove any rust or dirt from  the places where the wheel attaches to the  vehicle  In an emergency  you can use a cloth  or a paper towel to do this  but be sure to use  a scraper or wire brush later  if you need to  to  get all the rust or dirt off        8     Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts  If  you do  the nuts might come loose  Your wheel  could fall off  causing a serious accident        Install the compact spare tire          Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of  the nuts toward the wheel  Tighten each nut by  hand until the wheel is held against the hub     5 75    10  Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench  counterclockwise  Lower the jack completely     11  Tighten the wheel nuts    j firmly in a crisscross  sequence  as shown     ae    OO        Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose    and even come off  This could lead to an  accident  Be sure to use the correct wheel  nuts  If you have to replace them  be sure to  get new GM original equipment wheel nuts     CAUTION   Continued        5 76    Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have    the nuts tightened with a torq
137. e without a crash  To help  avoid injury to yourself or others  have your  vehicle serviced right away if the air bag  readiness light stays on after you start your  vehicle        Charging System Light    The charging system light  will come on when you  turn on the ignition    until the engine is started   as a check to show   you it is working     When the engine is running  the light should go out     If the light illuminates and the Check Alternator message  on the trip computer stays on  or comes on while you  are driving you may have a problem with the electrical  charging system  It could indicate that you have a loose  generator drive belt or another electrical problem    Have it checked right away  Driving while this light is on  could drain your battery     If you must drive a short distance with the light on  be  certain to turn off all your accessories  such as the radio  and air conditioner     The Check Alternator message will remain until the  MODE button on the trip computer is pressed  but the  symbol will remain until the problem is fixed     Brake System Warning Light    O    BRAKE    To check that the light is  working  the symbol is  displayed when the ignition  is first turned ON and   the park brake applied     If the symbol illuminates and the Brake message  appears on the trip computer display while driving and  the park brake is released  a fault with the brakes is  indicated  You should immediately stop the car on the  side of the road as carefully
138. eature is off     3 39    Trip A B    When the Time to Arrival Distance to Arrival Fuel  Remaining set of windows are turned on  using vehicle  personalization  and are showing on the display    hold the MODE button down for two seconds  Now   instead of the Time to Arrival set of displays  the   trip computer shows Trip B details     Press the MODE button to view your displays  You now  have two different sets of trip displays counting  your  original set of trip displays  labeled A while B is turned  on  and a new set of trip displays  labelled B  This is  useful on a long trip  as Trip B can be reset at the  beginning of the journey and then locked away    by pressing the MODE button for two seconds when  Trip B is shown   Time to Arrival Distance to  Arrival Remaining Fuel will again be shown on the  display  but Trip B is still counting away in the  background and the original trip display can be used for  short distances during the journey  Trip B can be  viewed at any time by pressing the MODE button for  two seconds when Distance to Arrival is shown     Trip A B can also be enabled disabled in vehicle  personalization  See Vehicle Personalization on  page 2 32  If the Trip A and B function is selected   the Average Speed and Average Fuel displays  indicate Trip A     3 40    Trip Computer Notes     e If the wrong buttons are accidentally pressed   causing the window to show a display other  than normal  turn the ignition off then on again  when the vehicle is standing
139. ee Replacing  Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 53     Safety Belt Extender    If the vehicle   s safety belt will fasten around you  you  should use it     But if a safety belt isn   t long enough to fasten  your  dealer will order you an extender  It   s free  When you go  in to order it  take the heaviest coat you will wear  so  the extender will be long enough for you  The extender  will be just for you  and just for the seat in your   vehicle that you choose  Don   t let someone else use it   and use it only for the seat it is made to fit  To wear   it  just attach it to the regular safety belt     1 25    Child Restraints  Older Children       Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  wear the vehicle   s safety belts     1 26      What is the proper way to wear safety belts      gt  QO      If possible  an older child should wear a  lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a  shoulder belt can provide  The shoulder belt  should not cross the face or neck  The lap belt  should fit snugly below the hips  just touching the  top of the thighs  It should never be worn over  the abdomen  which could cause severe or even  fatal internal injuries in a crash     Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  are restrained in the rear seat     In a crash  children who are not buckled up can strike  other people who are buckled up  or can be thrown  out of the vehicle  Older children need to use safety  belts properly     Never do t
140. eee eee 5 51  Hood Release sf nivel scsi Aase sn ice innate A 5 11 Inflation   Tire Pressure  aan 5 58  Engine Compartment Overview                 0   5 12 Tire Inspection and Rotation                   sssss 5 62  Engine Oil ES se PO 5 13 When It Is Time for New TINGS 2    5 64  Engine Air Cleaner Filter             cc eeeeeeeeeeneee ees 5 18 Buying New Tires     0  cccccccceseeescesecesseesereeees 5 65  Automatic Transmission Fluid 2    5 19 Uniform Tire Quality Grading             c0 cceeee 5 66  Manual Transmission FIUO rasen esse 5 23 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance                       5 67  Hydraulic Clue 522 aceine Socaagu aida nani EE TEA 5 24 Wheel Replacement cesser 5 68  Engine Coolant              ssesesee eerste 5 25 Tire CHAINS seiorn a cease le ea teeta 5 69  Engine Overheating serene 5 28 If a Tire Goes Flat acta seac secs cde wagtat teases  5 70  Cooling System EDEL EDEL EEE EEE 5 31 Changing a Flat Tire cc 5 71  Power Steering Fluid 2222 screen sussie bre 5 36 Compact Spare Tire 1  5 77    5 1    Section 5 Service and Appearance Care    Appearance Care                   ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 5 78  Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle                   5 79  Care of Safety Belts               ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 81  Weatherstrips  54245 elg riee ale tekoset sitnine 5 81  Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle                5 82  Sheet Metal Damage                 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 84  Finish  DAMAGE  15252 oe sensed 5 84  Underbody Maint
141. eeeeeeenes 5 83    Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses               0  0 00 5 82  Cleaning Fabric Carpet             cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 79  Cleaning Glass Surfaces              eceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 5 81  Cleaning Interior Plastic Components                   5 81  Cleaning Leather             cccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeee een eeaes 5 80  Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel             5 81  Cleaning Tite  isc  sesvsed bredere ere eee geas 5 84  Cleaning  VIA  arahina eens 5 80  Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades                5 83  Climate Control System            ceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeenes 3 19   Outlet Adjustment   2 0 2 0     ceeeeeee terete eee eee rener 3 22  Clutch   Hy Gnauli   i    sccc2s2cestecea cacveinecadeateasacea vetvass 5 24  Compact Spare Tire           cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 77  CONFIRMATION BEEPS             eceeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 35  Content Theft Deferrent                  eceeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 2 14  Control of a Vehicle            ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee renere 4 5  Coolant   Engine Temperature Gage             eeeeeeeeneee ees 3 28  COOLING SYSTEM vrci ponn F  R UNE 5 31  COURTESY LAMP TIMEOUT re abe enda 2 36  Courtesy LAMPS 22355 arie rarere ni i Es rr 3 15  Cruise COMO dcere na kla E 3 9  CUPMOIGEL S  salsa en dab aeaa aR 2 31  Current and Past Model Order Forms                  7 12    Customer Assistance Information    Courtesy Transportation                ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee es 7 7  Customer Assistance for Text Telephone  TTY   USES
142. eees 1 4  Manual Lumbar  ssepe resinte nenia 1 2  Power Seats            cccceceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2  Reclining Seatbacks               cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee reas 1 3  Seatback  Latches 2s  cscde0   sosczec she venwe ns tacinedaoeeeed 1 4    Securing a Child Restraint    Designed for the LATCH System               005 1 40  Rear Seat Position             ccceceeeeeeeeeee eee sra 1 40  Right Front Seat Position               c eceeeeeeee ees 1 43  Security LIGNE sisgdreccatidateastitelieweahenecuedanseaneteces 3 33  Security Release Procedure                  sceeeeeeeees 3 52  Security While You Travel            0  0cceeeeeeneeeeen eens 7 5  SGIVICE  E A era ens 5 3  Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your  Vehicle va tindadectunicotan rnea iea iea 5 5  Doing Your Own Work 5225 ri dere nei 5 4  Engine Soon Light               c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 29  Publications Ordering Information                0 7 11  Vehicle Soon Light                ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 34  Service Bulletins               ccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeee een eeaes 7 11  Service Manuals                ccceceeeeeeeneeeee hare kd 7 11  Setting Preset Stations                 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 44  Setting the  TiME   dsisezesesesevatieawecsesenieteceessucsess 3 42  Setting the Tone  Bass Treble                    eeeeeeeee 3 45  Sheet Metal Damage               ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 84  Shift Lock Release                c eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 2 26  Shift Speeds 2 0 00    c
143. eererenee 3 5  Theft Deterrent  Radio                ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 52  Theft Deterrent System       u   sssseverererernernee 2 12    12    Theft Deterrent Systems    Content Theft Deterrent                 eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 2 14  Im Mobiler ioien aaae ei ien cc ENES 2 12  Immobilizer Operation        W  u     ssssseeeerererenee 2 13  Tilt Wheel a5  5455 oo fede na atetan iaeia 3 5  TIME  TO ARRIVAL  cciccetisnedet aintoentstoiadsnsactentses 3 37  Tire Inflation Check           cceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeees 6 10  Tire Sidewall Labeling               c eseeeeeeeneeeeeeeee ees 5 52  MRE UOIZEY REE tts sans a E 5 55  Tire Terminology and Definitions                   5 56  TGS  wssadtvdetiaxs E E E 5 51  Buying  NOW TIES sivscnccsestine es tarinnecagierweaacans 5 65  GRAINS  23422033 2deeeinaiwessgee beter seeveereioaweescereees 5 69  Changing a Flat Tire           cceceeeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 5 71  Compact Spare Tire            ceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 5 77  If a Tire    Goes  Flat   ssecscasectic nse eciierte cae 5 70  Inflation   Tire Pressure a   n 5 58  Inspection and Rotation                    ceeeeee eee 5 62  Uniform Tire Quality Grading               eeeeeeee 5 66  Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance                   5 67  Wheel Replacement                0 cseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 68  When It Is Time for New Tires               e eee 5 64  TOD Strap eiii aaia a EOS 1 36  Top Strap Anchor Location                   0ceeeeeeeee es 1 37  Torque LOCK 52 rl ln a 2 25
144. elt Reminder Light    When the key is turned to  ON  the safety belt light  will come on and stay   on for several seconds and  a chime will be sounded  for eight seconds    then it will flash  continuously until the  driver   s belt is buckled     IA       If the drivers belt is already buckled  the light will not  come on     3 25    Air Bag Readiness Light    A    This light along with a Airbag Fault message in the trip  computer display will come on when you start your  vehicle  and it will flash for a few seconds  Then the light  should go out  This means the system is ready     The system checks the air bag   s electrical system for  malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an electrical  problem  The system check includes the air bag  sensors  the air bag modules  the wiring and the  diagnostic module  For more information on the air bag  system  see Supplemental Restraint System  SRS      There is an air bag  readiness light on the  instrument panel which  shows the air bag symbol     3 26    If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the  vehicle or comes on when you are driving  your air   bag system may not work properly  Have your vehicle  serviced right away  The light comes on after an  accident where the air bags were activated     If the air bag readiness light stays on after you  start your vehicle  it means the air bag system  may not be working properly  The air bags in    your vehicle may not inflate in a crash  or they  could even inflat
145. enance     W    ssssseeeeeerererenrns 5 84  Chemical Paint Spotting                 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 84  Vehicle Care Appearance Materials                0  5 85    Vehicle Identification                 Vehicle Identification Number     VIN  succes    Service Parts Identification Label                          Electrical System                       Add On Electrical Equipment    Fuses and Circuit Breakers       Capacities and Specifications       Service    Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to  be happy with it  We hope you will go to your dealer   for all your service needs  You will get genuine GM parts  and GM trained and supported service people     We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM   Genuine GM parts have one of these marks     ACVelco     E parts    GM    e    Goodwrench    E  Accessories    California Proposition 65 Warning    Most motor vehicles  including this one  contain and or  emit chemicals known to the State of California to  cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive  harm  Engine exhaust  many parts and systems   including some inside the vehicle   many fluids  and  some component wear by products contain and or emit  these chemicals     Doing Your Own Service Work    If you want to do some of your own service work  you  will want to use the proper service manual  It tells   you much more about how to service your vehicle than  this manual can  To order the proper service manual   see Service Publications Orde
146. enance Schedule for all models     In Portfolio  Includes a Portfolio  Owner   s Manual  and  Warranty Booklet     RETAIL SELL PRICE   35 00  Without Portfolio  Owner s Manual only   RETAIL SELL PRICE   25 00    Current and Past Model Order Forms    Service Publications are available for current and  past model GM vehicles  To request an order form   please specify year and model name of the vehicle     7 12    ORDER TOLL FREE  1 800 551 4123  Monday Friday 8 00 AM   6 00 PM  Eastern Time   For Credit Card Orders Only     VISA MasterCard Discover   visit Helm  Inc  on the  World Wide Web at  www helminc com    Or you can write to     Helm  Incorporated  P  O  Box 07130  Detroit  MI 48207    Prices are subject to change without notice and without  incurring obligation  Allow ample time for delivery     Note to Canadian Customers  All listed prices are  quoted in U S  funds  Canadian residents are to make  checks payable in U S  funds     Appearance Care          cceceeceeeeeeneeete eee eeneea een ees 5 78    Accessory Control  Accessory Power Outlets  Adding Washer Fluid  Additional Program Information  Additives  Fuel  Add On Electrical Equipment  Adjusting the Speakers  Balance Fade     Readiness Light  Air Bag Systems  How Does an Air Bag Restrain                 05 1 50  Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle  What Makes an Air Bag Inflate                  0  1 50  What Will You See After an Air Bag  INflAteS  oo    eee eee cece neien 1 50  When Should an Air Bag Inflate 
147. enance can even  affect the quality of the air we breathe  Improper fluid  levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of  emissions from your vehicle  To help protect our  environment  and to keep your vehicle in good condition   be sure to maintain your vehicle properly     Using Your Maintenance Schedule    We at General Motors want to help you keep your  vehicle in good working condition  But we do not know  exactly how you will drive it  You may drive very   short distances only a few times a week  Or you may  drive long distances all the time in very hot  dusty  weather  You may use your vehicle in making deliveries   Or you may drive it to work  to do errands or in many  other ways     Because of all the different ways people use their  vehicles  maintenance needs vary  You may need more  frequent checks and replacements  So please read   the following and note how you drive  If you have any  questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition   see your GM Goodwrench dealer     This schedule is for vehicles that     e carry passengers and cargo within recommended  limits  You will find these limits on the tire and  loading information label  See Loading Your Vehicle  on page 4 30    e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  driving limits      use the recommended fuel  See Gasoline Octane  on page 5 5     The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4  should be performed when indicated  See Additional  Required Services on page 6 6 a
148. ent of Transportation  DOT  code indicates that  the tire is in compliance with the U S  Department of  Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards      C  Tire Identification Number  TIN   The letters and  numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification  Number  TIN   The TIN shows the manufacturer   and plant code  tire size  and date the tire was  manufactured  The TIN is molded onto both sides of the  tire  although only one side may have the date of  manufacture      D  Tire Ply Material  The type of cord and number of  plies in the sidewall and under the tread      E  Uniform Tire Quality Grading  UTQG   Tire  manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three  performance factors  treadwear  traction and  temperature resistance  For more information see  Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 66      F  Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit  Maximum  load that can be carried and the maximum pressure  needed to support that load  For information on  recommended tire pressure see Inflation   Tire Pressure  on page 5 58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30     5 53    5 54     pRY USE Oy     WBELESS OOOO Gag       M     Compact Spare Tire Example    e   g c  ED  io  3    D        A  Temporary Use Only  The compact spare tire or  temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately  3 000 miles  5 000 km  and should not be driven   at speeds over 65 mph  105 km h   The compact spare  tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire   has lost air and gone fla
149. equalization  will be automatically set whenever you play a CD  For  more information on EQ  see    EQ    listed previously   in this section     M4 SEEK TRACK PPI   Press the left arrow to go to  the start of the current track  if more than 10 seconds  have passed  Press the right arrow to go to the   next track  If you press either arrow more than once  the  player will continue moving backward or forward  through the CD     3 47      4 TUNE CD    When more than one CD is loaded   press the left or right arrow to go to the previous or  next CD loaded     FR FF  Fast Reverse  Fast Forward   Press and hold  FR to reverse quickly within a track  Press and hold   FF to advance quickly within a track  You will hear sound  at a reduced volume  Release the button to play the  passage  The elapsed time of the track will appear on  the display     EJECT  Press this button to eject a single CD or  multiple CDs     To eject the CD that is currently playing  press and  release this button  REMOVE CD will appear on   the display  the light located to the left of the slot will  flash  and the radio will produce a beep  if beeps   are turned on  See    Confirmation Beeps    later in this  section for information about turning beeps on and off   You can now remove the CD  Press the LOAD   button to cancel the eject function     3 48    To eject multiple CDs  press and hold this button for two  seconds  EJECTING ALL will appear on the display    the light located to the left of the slot wil
150. er the  engine has not been running for at least five hours   However  the hot level check is always recommended     The fluid level can be viewed through the reservoir    The level markings are next to the fluid window  When  the fluid is cold the level should be between the   COLD MIN and MAX marks  when the vehicle has been  driven for awhile and the fluid is hot the level should   be between the HOT MIN and MAX marks  If fluid must  be added  undo the cap counterclockwise to the   stop  then the cap can be lifted off  Do not overfill and  remember to replace the cap tightly  If you often need to  add fluid  you should see your dealer  Remember to  secure the cap when the level is correct and clean up  any spillage     What to Use    To determine what kind of fluid to use  see  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13   Always use the proper fluid  Failure to use the proper  fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals     Windshield Washer Fluid  What to Use    When you need windshield washer fluid  be sure to read  the manufacturer   s instructions before use  If you will   be operating your vehicle in an area where the  temperature may fall below freezing  use a fluid that has  sufficient protection against freezing  See Engine  Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir  location     Adding Washer Fluid    Open the cap and add  washer fluid until the tank  is full  Make sure the   cap is secured after filling        Notice     When using concentrated was
151. er you leave it    Outsiders can easily enter through an  unlocked door when you slow down or  stop your vehicle  Locking your doors can  help prevent this from happening        There are several ways to unlock and lock your vehicle     To unlock the doors from inside the vehicle  pull up   on the door lock knob  To lock the doors  press the knob  down  If you use the driver   s door lock knob  both   doors will lock or unlock     Automatic transmission vehicles have an automatic  locking in DRIVE  D  feature which locks the doors  automatically when the transmission selector is shifted  out of PARK  P   To select this feature  see Vehicle  Personalization on page 2 32     For safety reasons  vehicles cannot be locked using the  remote key if the key is in the ignition or if the drivers  door is open     To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside  use  your key or the remote buttons on the key     To lock the doors from the outside  do the following   1  Insert the key in the driver s door lock   2  Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle     3  Then turn the key back to the vertical position and  remove     The alarm system is not set using this method    To unlock the doors from the outside  do the following   1  Insert the key in the driver   s door lock   2  Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle     3  Then turn the key back to the vertical position and  remove     The alarm system will go off as soon as a door is  opened  If this happens  turn the key i
152. ering Programming Mode    The vehicle programming mode is accessed through the  Options Menu  To access the Options Menu  do the  following     1  When the vehicle is  stationary  hold down  the MODE button while  turning the ignition  from LOCK to ON     2  When the vehicle has been started  the system  check completed and the vehicle speed is less  than 6 mph  10 km h   then the Options Menu is  displayed for three seconds     If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph  10 km h   the  Options Menu disappears and the display reverts  back to the previous trip computer function    The programming mode is not accessible if an  alarm warning has been activated or a warning  symbol on the instrument panel has been triggered     VA  Programming Mode Selection   When the  Options Menu is displayed  use the trip computer up or  down arrows to enter the programming mode     There are help screens available to assist you in  understanding the feature that you are adjusting  If a  menu item is selected and the screen is left for  more than five seconds  a help screen displays to  inform you how to operate the selected feature     Navigating the Menu    To scroll through the different personalization features   press the MODE button  To change the setting  use  the up or down arrows  To continue  press the MODE  button     The following information shows how to reset or  customize features after entering the main menu     RESTORE TO FACTORY SETTINGS    This option restores the instrument panel
153. ery 1 000 miles  1 600 km   so your brakes will adjust  properly     Replacing Brake System Parts    The braking system on a vehicle is complex  Its many  parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  the vehicle is to have really good braking  Your  vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM  brake parts  When you replace parts of your braking  system     for example  when your brake linings   wear down and you need new ones put in     be sure  you get new approved GM replacement parts  If you do  not  your brakes may no longer work properly  For  example  if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong  for your vehicle  the balance between your front and  rear brakes can change     for the worse  The braking  performance you have come to expect can change   in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong  replacement brake parts     Battery    Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free  battery  When it is time for a new battery  get one that  has the replacement number shown on the original  battery s label  We recommend an ACDelco   battery   See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12  for battery location    Warning  Battery posts  terminals and related  accessories contain lead and lead compounds   chemicals known to the State of California to cause  cancer and reproductive harm  Wash hands after  handling     Vehicle Storage    If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days  or more  remove the black  negative       cable from  the 
154. es    Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs  and the performance of the emission control system  may be affected  The malfunction indicator lamp   may turn on  If this occurs  return to your authorized GM  dealer for service     Fuels in Foreign Countries    If you plan on driving in another country outside the  United States or Canada  the proper fuel may be hard  to find  Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel  not recommended in the previous text on fuel  Costly  repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not   be covered by your warranty     To check the fuel availability  ask an auto club  or  contact a major oil company that does business in the  country where you will be driving     Filling Your Tank    Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can  cause bad injuries  To help avoid injuries to    you and others  read and follow all the  instructions on the pump island  Turn off your  engine when you are refueling  Do not smoke  if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle     CAUTION   Continued        Keep sparks  flames and smoking materials  away from fuel  Do not leave the fuel pump  unattended when refueling your vehicle     this  is against the law in some places  Keep  children away from the fuel pump  never let  children pump fuel        The fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the    passenger   s side of your vehicle     The fuel release button is  located on the instrument  panel to the left of the  steering wheel  Pu
155. es  after the button is pressed  The defogger can also   be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning  off the engine     Notice  Don   t use anything sharp on the inside of  the rear window  If you do  you could cut or damage  the warming grid  and the repairs wouldn   t be  covered by your warranty  Do not attach a temporary  vehicle license  tape  a decal or anything similar   to the defogger grid     3 21    Outlet Adjustment Operation Tips      Clear away any ice  snow or leaves from the air  inlets at the base of the windshield that may  block the flow of air into your vehicle     a pe a a   Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may  ies   ee I Eon TET   adversely affect performance of the system    OT coy TY TL eos TT     When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is  Sd es encountered  use the recirculation mode  with the  temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent  the odor from entering the vehicle through the  ventilation system  This can be helpful when driving  through a long tunnel with poor ventilation   However  extended usage of this mode in cold or  cool weather can cause window fogging        Move the thumbwheel on the vents to change the  direction of the airflow  The center thumbwheel adjusts  the volume of the airflow     There are also similar vents for the rear of the vehicle   They are located at the rear of the center console     3 22    Warning Lights  Gages  and  Indicators    This part describes the warning lights and ga
156. essary  use non abrasive cleaners that  are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove  foreign matter     Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging  weather  and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a  period of years  You can help to keep the paint finish  looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered  whenever possible     Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades    If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield  washer  or if the wiper blade chatters when running   wax  sap or other material may be on the blade   or windshield     Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength  glass cleaning liquid  The windshield is clean if beads do  not form when you rinse it with water     Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades  and affect their performance  Clean the blade by  wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength  windshield washer solvent  Then rinse the blade   with water     Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary   replace blades that look worn     Cleaning Aluminum Wheels    Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with  mild soap and water  Rinse with clean water  After  rinsing thoroughly  dry with a soft clean towel  A wax  may then be applied     The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  surface of your vehicle  Do not use strong soaps   chemicals  abrasive polishes  abrasive cleaners   cleaners with acid  or abrasive cleaning brushes on  them because you could damage
157. eways  also called thruways  parkways   expressways  turnpikes or superhighways  are the    safest of all roads  But they have their own special rules     The most important advice on freeway driving is   Keep up with traffic and keep to the right  Drive at the  same speed most of the other drivers are driving     Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow     Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane     4 20    At the entrance  there is usually a ramp that leads to  the freeway  If you have a clear view of the freeway as  you drive along the entrance ramp  you should begin   to check traffic  Try to determine where you expect   to blend with the flow  Try to merge into the gap at close  to the prevailing speed  Switch on your turn signal   check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as  often as necessary  Try to blend smoothly with the  traffic flow     Once you are on the freeway  adjust your speed to the  posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower   Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass     Before changing lanes  check your mirrors  Then use  your turn signal     Just before you leave the lane  glance quickly over your  shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in  your    blind    spot     Once you are moving on the freeway  make certain you  allow a reasonable following distance   Expect to move slightly slower at night     When you want to leave the freeway  move to the  proper lane well in advance  If you mis
158. f a tire   s height to its  width     Belt  A rubber coated layer of cords that is located  between the plies and the tread  Cords may be made  from steel or other reinforcing materials     Bead  The tire bead contains steel wires that hold the  tire onto the rim     Bias Ply Tire  A pneumatic tire in which the plies are  laid at alternate angles  less than 90 degrees to the  centerline of the tread     Cold Inflation Pressure  The amount of air pressure in  a tire  measured in pounds per square inch  psi  or  kilopascal  kPa   before a tire has built up heat   from driving  See Inflation   Tire Pressure on page 5 58     5 56    Curb Weight  This means the weight of a motor  vehicle with standard and optional equipment including  the maximum capacity of fuel  oil and coolant  but  without passengers and cargo     DOT Markings  A code molded into the sidewall of a  tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S   Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety  standards  The DOT code includes the Tire Identification  Number  TIN   an alphanumeric designator which can  also identify the tire manufacturer  production plant   brand and date of production     GVWR  Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  see Loading  Your Vehicle on page 4 30     GAWR FRT  Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front  axle  see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30     GAWR RR  Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle   see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30     Intended Outboard Sidewall  The side of
159. ff the  accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly   Steer to maintain lane position  and then gently brake to  a stop well out of the traffic lane     A rear blowout  particularly on a curve  acts much like a  skid and may require the same correction you   d use   in a skid  In any rear blowout  remove your foot from the  accelerator pedal  Get the vehicle under control by  steering the way you want the vehicle to go  It may be  very bumpy and noisy  but you can still steer  Gently  brake to a stop  well off the road if possible     5 70    Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  maintenance or repairs is dangerous without  the appropriate safety equipment and training     The jack provided with your vehicle is  designed only for changing a flat tire  If it is  used for anything else  you or others could be  badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off  the jack  Use the jack provided with your  vehicle only for changing a flat tire        If a tire goes flat  the next part shows how to use your  jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely     Changing a Flat Tire    If a tire goes flat  avoid further tire and wheel damage  by driving slowly to a level place  Turn on your  hazard warning flashers     Changing a tire can be dangerous  The vehicle  can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you  or other people  You and they could be badly  injured or even killed  Find a level place to  change your tire  To help prevent the vehicle  from moving     1
160. forward  and rearward  The vertical switch is used to electrically  adjust the angle of the back of the seat     To adjust the seat  do the following     1 2       e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the  horizontal switch toward the front or rear of the  vehicle       Raise or lower the seat cushion by sliding the  horizontal switch up or down       Tilt the horizontal switch up at the front to tilt the  front of the seat up  and tilt the horizontal switch  down at the rear to tilt the seat down at the rear       Tilt the vertical switch to adjust the angle of  the seatback  The seat back moves in the same  direction that the switch is tilted to     Manual Lumbar    The manual lumbar control  lets you adjust the amount  of support in the lower  seatback     The control is located on the outboard side of the seat  cushion     To increase or decrease lumbar support  turn the knob     Reclining Seatbacks    Use the vertical switch on the outboard side of the front  seat cushion to recline the seatbacks     Tilt the vertical switch to adjust the angle of the  seatback  The seatback moves in the same direction  that the switch is tilted to           But don   t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is  moving     Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle  is in motion can be dangerous  Even if you  buckle up  your safety belts can   t do their job  when you re reclined like this     The shoulder belt can   t do its job because it  won   t be against your body
161. ges that  may be on your vehicle  The pictures will help you  locate them     Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause   an expensive repair or replacement  Paying attention to  your warning lights and gages could also save you   or others from injury     Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  problem with one of your vehicle   s functions  As you will  see in the details on the next few pages  some   warning lights come on briefly when you start the  engine just to let you know they   re working  If you are  familiar with this section  you should not be alarmed  when this happens     Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  with one of your vehicle   s functions  Often gages   and warning lights work together to let you know when  there   s a problem with your vehicle     When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  when you are driving  or when one of the gages   shows there may be a problem  check the section that  tells you what to do about it  Please follow this  manual   s advice  Waiting to do repairs can be   costly     and even dangerous  So please get to know  your warning lights and gages  They re a big help     Your vehicle also has a trip computer that works along  with the warning lights and gages  The trip computer  display provides visual information  See Trip Computer  on page 3 36  The warning message are displayed  through the trip computer or as an illuminated sy
162. h  The three digit number indicates the  tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall      C  Aspect Ratio  A two digit number that indicates  the tire height to width measurements  For example  if  the tire size aspect ratio is    70     as shown in item    C    of  the illustration  it would mean that the tire   s sidewall is  70  as high as it is wide      D  Construction Code  A letter code is used to  indicate the type of ply construction in the tire  The  letter    R    means radial ply construction  the letter    D     means diagonal or bias ply construction  and the  letter    B    means belted bias ply construction      E  Rim Diameter  Diameter of the wheel in inches      F  Service Description  These characters represent  the load range and the speed rating of a tire  The  load range represents the load carry capacity a tire is  certified to carry  The speed rating is the maximum  speed a tire is certified to carry a load  Speed ratings  range from    A    to    Z        5 55    Tire Terminology and Definitions    Air Pressure  The amount of air inside the tire pressing  outward on each square inch of the tire  Air pressure   is expressed in pounds per square inch  psi  or  kilopascal  kPa      Accessory Weight  This means the combined weight  of optional accessories  Some examples of optional  accessories are  automatic transmission  power steering   power brakes  power windows  power seats  and air  conditioning     Aspect Ratio  The relationship o
163. h your headlamps  Let the  heater run for a while     Then  shut the engine off and close the window almost  all the way to preserve the heat  Start the engine   again and repeat this only when you feel really  uncomfortable from the cold  But do it as little as  possible  Preserve the fuel as long as you can  To help  keep warm  you can get out of the vehicle and do   some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until  help comes     If You Are Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice  or Snow    In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck  you will  need to spin the wheels  but you do not want to   spin your wheels too fast  The method known as     rocking    can help you get out when you are stuck  but  you must use caution     4 28    If you let your tires spin at high speed  they can  explode  and you or others could be injured   And  the transmission or other parts of the    vehicle can overheat  That could cause an  engine compartment fire or other damage   When you are stuck  spin the wheels as little as  possible  Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph   55 km h  as shown on the speedometer        Notice  Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of  your vehicle as well as the tires  If you spin the  wheels too fast while shifting your transmission  back and forth  you can destroy your transmission     For information about using tire chains on your  vehicle  see Tire Chains on page 5 69     Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out    First  turn your steering wheel left and right  
164. hat corresponds to the CD you want to play   The CD number that is playing will flash  and the   track number will appear     If an error appears on the display  see    CD Messages     later in this section     TRACK SCAN  Press this button to listen to the first  10 seconds of each track on the CD that is playing   Press this button again to stop scanning     TRACK REPEAT  Press this button to repeat the track  that is playing  Press this button again to turn off  repeat play     TRACK RANDOM  Press this button to listen to the  tracks  on the CD that is playing  in random  rather than  sequential order  Press this button again to turn off  random play     CD SCAN  If more than one CD is loaded  press this  button to listen to the first 10 seconds of the first track on  each CD that is loaded  Press this button again to   stop scanning     CD REPEAT  If more than one CD is loaded  press this  button to repeat the CD that is currently playing   Press this button again to turn off repeat play     CD RANDOM  If more than one CD is loaded  press  this button to play all of the CDs in random  rather than  sequential order  Press this button again to turn off  random play     ll  Pause   Press this button to pause a CD  PAUSE or  CD PAUSED will appear on the display  Press this  button again to play the CD     FM AM  Press this button to listen to the radio when a  CD s  is playing     EQ  Equalization   Press EQ to select the desired  equalization setting while playing a CD  The 
165. he driver s side of the vehicle  See  Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more  information on location     Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the  engine and radiator are hot can allow steam  and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you  badly  Never turn the surge tank pressure   cap     even a little     when the engine and  radiator are hot     The coolant level should be checked at least weekly  by  looking at the level on the coolant reservoir when the  engine is cold  The vehicle must be on a level surface   When your engine is cold  the coolant level should   be at or slightly above the COLD FILL mark  at   the center weld joint  The level rises when the engine is  running and drops when the engine cools down  If   the level falls below the weld joint  the coolant should  be added to a little over the mark  Do not overfill    as coolant requires space to expand when warmed up     If the Low Coolant message on the trip computer  display comes on and stays on  it means you re low on  engine coolant  You should check the level as soon   as possible  You may have to check the coolant level  when it is hot  See Engine Overheating on page 5 28     5 27    Adding Coolant    If you need more coolant  add the proper DEX COOL    coolant mixture at the surge tank  but only when the  engine is cool     You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot    engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol   and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Do not spill
166. he engine  running    With the parking brake applied  place the shift lever  in PARK  P     With your foot on the brake pedal  move the shift  lever through each gear range  pausing for about  three seconds in each range  Then  position the shift  lever in PARK  P      Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more     Then  without shutting off the engine  follow these steps     The automatic transmission dipstick is located at the  rear of the engine compartment  on the right side of the  vehicle  See Engine Compartment Overview on   page 5 12 for more information on location     1  Unclip the handle and remove the dipstick  wipe it  clean with a clean rag or paper towel and re insert  it fully  Remove it again and read the fluid level     2  Check both sides of the dipstick  and read the lower  level  The fluid level must be in the COLD area for  a cold check or in the cross hatched HOT area  for a hot check     3  If the fluid level is in the acceptable range  push the  dipstick back in all the way     Remember to always replace the dipstick and lock  the handle down     5 21    How to Add Fluid    Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  kind of transmission fluid to use  See Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13     Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while  it is hot  A cold check is used only as a reference  If   the fluid level is low  add only enough of the proper fluid  to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot che
167. he entire area immediately or it will set   Using Cleaner on Fabric    1  Vacuum and brush the area to remove any  loose dirt     2  Always clean a whole trim panel or section   Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines     3  Follow the directions on the container label     4  Apply cleaner with a clean sponge  Do not saturate  the material and do not rub it roughly     5  As soon as you have cleaned the section  use a  sponge to remove any excess cleaner     6  Wipe cleaned area with a clean  water dampened  towel or cloth     7  Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry     5 79    Special Fabric Cleaning Problems    Stains caused by such things as catsup  coffee  black    egg  fruit  fruit juice  milk  soft drinks  vomit  urine  and blood can be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain  then sponge the  soiled area with cool water     2  If a stain remains  follow the cleaning instructions  described earlier     3  If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine  treat  the area with a water and baking soda solution   1 teaspoon  5 ml  of baking soda to 1 cup  250 ml   of lukewarm water     4  Let dry     Stains caused by candy  ice cream  mayonnaise  chili  sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows     1  Carefully scrape off excess stain   2  Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely     3  If a stain remains  follow the cleaner instructions  described earlier     5 80    Cleaning Vinyl  Use warm water and a clean cloth       Rub wi
168. he off  position       The parking brake is released       For vehicles with automatic transmissions  the shift  lever is not in PARK  P      When the DRL system is on  the taillamps  sidemarker  lamps  parking lamps  and instrument panel lights   will not be illuminated unless you have turned the  exterior lamps control to the parking lamp or headlamp  position     The DRL system will remain off any time your vehicle is  in PARK  P  or the parking brake is engaged the first  time the ignition is turned on     As with any vehicle  you should turn on the regular  headlamp system when you need it     Automatic Headlamp System    When it is dark enough outside  your Automatic  Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the  normal brightness along with other lamps such as  the taillamps  sidemarker  parking lamps  and the    instrument panel lights  The radio lights will also be dim     Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the  top of the instrument panel under the defroster   grill  Make sure it is not covered  which will cause the  system to be on whenever the ignition is on     The system may also be on when driving through a  parking garage  heavy overcast weather  or a tunnel   This is normal     If you start your vehicle in a dark garage  the automatic  headlamp system will come on immediately     As with any vehicle  you should turn on the regular  headlamps when you need them     The headlamps can be set to come on at different  levels  The sensitivity can
169. head braking  traction tests  and does not include acceleration   cornering  hydroplaning  or peak traction characteristics     Temperature     A  B  C    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire   s resistance to the generation   of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested  under controlled conditions on a specified indoor  laboratory test wheel  Sustained high temperature can  cause the material of the tire to degenerate and  reduce tire life  and excessive temperature can lead to  sudden tire failure  The grade C corresponds to a  level of performance which all passenger car tires must  meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  No  109  Grades B and A represent higher levels of  performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  minimum required by law     Warning  The temperature grade for this tire is  established for a tire that is properly inflated and not  overloaded  Excessive speed  underinflation  or  excessive loading  either separately or in combination   can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure     Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced  carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life  and best overall performance     Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are  not needed  However  if you notice unusual tire wear or  your vehicle pulling one way or the other  the alignment  may need to be reset  If you notice your vehicle  vibrati
170. her  the CD should play      The air is very humid  If so  wait about an hour and  try again      There may have been a problem while burning  the CD      The label may be caught in the CD player     If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason   try a known good CD     If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  corrected  contact your dealer  If your radio displays an  error message  write it down and provide it to your  dealer when reporting the problem     Options Menu    The following features can be adjusted through the  vehicle   s options menu located in the instrument panel  cluster in the trip computer display window     Confirmation Beeps    Beeps are used to confirm various actions of the radio  such as storing a preset  The beeps can be turned   on or off using the options menu  See    Options Menu  Adjustment    later in this section to adjust the  confirmation beeps     All Beeps On  The radio will make a beep sound when  storing radio stations  when it is time to insert or  remove a CD from the CD changer  or to confirm that  the LOAD ALL or EJECT ALL functions have started     CD Beeps Only  The radio will make a beep sound  when it is time to insert or remove a CD from the CD  changer or to confirm that the LOAD ALL or EJECT ALL  functions have started     Beeps Off  The radio will not produce any beeps     3 49    Speed Dependent Volume  SDV     With SDV  your audio system adjusts automatically to  make up for road or wind noise as y
171. her fluid  follow    the manufacturer   s instructions for adding  water     Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid   Water can cause the solution to freeze and  damage your washer fluid tank and other parts  of the washer system  Also  water does not  clean as well as washer fluid     Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters  full when it is very cold  This allows for  expansion if freezing occurs  which could  damage the tank if it is completely full     Do not use engine coolant  antifreeze  in your  windshield washer  It can damage your washer  system and paint     5 37    Brakes  Brake Fluid    Your brake master cylinder  reservoir is filled with  DOT 4 brake fluid  See  Engine Compartment  Overview on page 5 12 for  the location of the  reservoir        There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  the reservoir might go down  The first is that the   brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during  normal brake lining wear  When new linings are put in   the fluid level goes back up  The other reason is   that fluid is leaking out of the brake system  If it is  you  should have your brake system fixed  since a leak  means that sooner or later your brakes will not work  well  or will not work at all     5 38    So  it is not a good idea to    top off    your brake fluid   Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak  If you add fluid  when your linings are worn  then you will have too  much fluid when you get new brake linings  You should  add
172. hicle will hand  your vehicle is in PARK  P    not move  even when you are on fairly level   ground  use the steps that follow  If you are   pulling a trailer  see Towing a Trailer on   page 4 35        2 24    Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine  Running    It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with  the engine running  Your vehicle could move  suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in    PARK  P  with the parking brake firmly set   And  if you leave the vehicle with the engine  running  it could overheat and even catch fire   You or others could be injured  Do not leave  your vehicle with the engine running        If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  running  be sure the vehicle is in PARK  P  and the  parking brake is firmly set before you leave it  After  you   ve moved the shift lever into PARK  P   hold the  regular brake pedal down  Then  see if you can  move the shift lever away from PARK  P   without first  pushing the shift lever button  If you can  it means  that the shift lever wasn   t fully locked into PARK  P      Torque Lock    If you are parking on a hill and you don   t shift your  transmission into PARK  P  properly  the weight of the  vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl   in the transmission  You may find it difficult to move the  shift lever out of PARK  P   This is called torque   lock  To prevent torque lock  set the parking brake and  then shift into PARK  P  properly before you leave   the driver   s seat  To find o
173. his     Here two children are wearing the same belt   The belt can   t properly spread the impact  forces  In a crash  the two children can be    crushed together and seriously injured  A belt  must be used by only one person at a time     but the child is so small that the shoulder belt  is very close to the child   s face or neck        Move the child toward the center of the vehicle   Be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child   s  shoulder  so that in a crash the child   s upper  body would have the restraint that belts provide  If  the child is sitting in a rear seat position  see  Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and  Small Adults on page 1 23     1 27       1 28    Never do this   Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a    lap shoulder belt  but the shoulder part is  behind the child  If the child wears the belt in  this way  in a crash the child might slide under  the belt  The belt   s force would then be applied  right on the child   s abdomen  That could cause  serious or fatal injuries        Wherever the child sits  the lap portion of the belt  should be worn low and snug on the hips  just touching  the child   s thighs  This applies belt force to the child   s  pelvic bones in a crash     Infants and Young Children    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection  This includes  infants and all other children  Neither the distance  traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  the need  for everyone  to use safety restraints  In fact
174. icle  that is not equipped with seats and safety  belts  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a    Don   t let anyone ride where he or she can   t seat and using a safety belt properly     wear a Safety belt properly  If you are ina  crash and you   re not wearing a safety belt   your injuries can be much worse  You can hit       Your vehicle has a light  that comes on as a    reminder to buckle up  See  Safety Belt Reminder  Light on page 3 25     In most states and in all Canadian provinces  the law  says to wear safety belts  Here   s why  They work     things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it   You can be seriously injured or killed  In the  same crash  you might not be  if you are  buckled up  Always fasten your safety belt   and check that your passengers    belts are  fastened properly too        1 6    You never know if you ll be in a crash  If you do have a  crash  you don   t know if it will be a bad one     A few crashes are mild  and some crashes can be so    serious that even buckled up  a person wouldn t survive     But most crashes are in between  In many of them   people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk  away  Without belts they could have been badly hurt  or killed     After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles  the  facts are clear  In most crashes buckling up does  matter    a lot     Why Safety Belts Work    When you ride in or on anything  you go as fast as  it goes        Take the simplest vehicle  Suppose it   s just a sea
175. ident  When you    change a wheel  remove any rust or dirt from    If your vehicle has 235 40ZR18 tires  they must roll in a places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle   certain direction for the best overall performance  In an emergency  you can use a cloth or a   The direction is shown by an arrow on the tire sidewall  paper towel to do this  but be sure to use a  Because these tires are uni directional  they should scraper or wire brush later  if you need to  to  be rotated as shown here  These tires should only be get all the rust or dirt off  See    Changing a Flat  moved from front to rear and rear to front on the Tire    in the Index     same side of the vehicle        Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation     5 63    When It Is Time for New Tires       5 64    One way to tell when it   s  time for new tires is to  check the treadwear  indicators  which will  appear when your tires  have only 1 16 inch    1 6 mm  or less of tread  remaining     You need a new tire if any of the following statements  are true     You can see the indicators at three or more places  around the tire     You can see cord or fabric showing through the  tire   s rubber     The tread or sidewall is cracked  cut or snagged  deep enough to show cord or fabric     The tire has a bump  bulge or split     The tire has a puncture  cut or other damage that  can   t be repaired well because of the size or  location of the damage     Buying New Tires    To find out what kind an
176. if you need more light     Be sure the battery has enough water  You do  not need to add water to the battery installed    in your new vehicle  But if a battery has filler  caps  be sure the right amount of fluid is there   If it is low  add water to take care of that first   If you don   t  explosive gas could be present     Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you   Do not get it on you  If you accidentally get it  in your eyes or on your skin  flush the place   with water and get medical help immediately        5 43    6  Connect the red positive     cable to the positive      terminal of the dead battery  Use a remote  positive     terminal if the vehicle has one     7  Don   t let the other end touch metal  Connect it to the  Fans or other moving engine parts can injure positive     terminal of the good battery  Use a   you badly  Keep your hands away from moving remote positive     terminal if the vehicle has one   parts once the engine is running  8  Now connect the black  negative       cable to  the negative      terminal of the good  battery  Use a remote  negative       terminal   if the vehicle has one        5  Check that the jumper cables don   t have loose or  missing insulation  If they do  you could get a  shock  The vehicles could be damaged too     Before you connect the cables  here are some  basic things you should know  Positive     will go to  positive     or to a remote positive     terminal if  the vehicle has one  Negative       will go to a hea
177. ight to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old     What you do in the daytime can also affect your   night vision  For example  if you spend the day in bright  sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses  Your   eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night  But if you  are driving  do not wear sunglasses at night  They   may cut down on glare from headlamps  but they also  make a lot of things invisible     4 15    You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  headlamps  It can take a second or two  or even several  seconds  for your eyes to readjust to the dark  When  you are faced with severe glare  as from a driver   who does not lower the high beams  or a vehicle with  misaimed headlamps   slow down a little  Avoid   staring directly into the approaching headlamps     Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  clean     inside and out  Glare at night is made much  worse by dirt on the glass  Even the inside of the glass  can build up a film caused by dust  Dirty glass makes  lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would   making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly     Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a  roadway when you are in a turn or curve  Keep   your eyes moving  that way  it is easier to pick out dimly  lighted objects  Just as your headlamps should be  checked regularly for proper aim  so should your eyes  be examined regularly  Some drivers suffer from   night blindness     the inability to see in dim light     and
178. iginal settings and no message  will appear on the display     Mobile Telephone    Your radio includes a telephone adapter  The phone  adapter and the radio are connected  If a mobile phone  hands free kit with the correct features  such as mute  line and wiring for a separate speaker has been  connected to it  the sound of the radio or CD will be  muted when the phone rings  the voice of the caller will  then be heard through the vehicle   s speakers  and  VOICE ON will appear on the display  When the call  ends  the radio or CD will come back on     If the radio is off  it will turn on for a phone call if the  vehicle   s ignition is in ON or ACCESSORY     If a call is in progress when the vehicle is turned off  the  radio will remain on until the call is completed     You can adjust the volume  bass  treble  fade  and  balance when a phone call is in progress without  affecting the radio settings     3 51    Theft Deterrent Feature    Your radio has an electronically coded security system   The system recognizes the vehicle which your radio  has been installed  If the radio is kept in the vehicle  the  PIN should not be required  even if the battery or the  radio has been removed and reinstalled     If the link between your vehicle and the radio is  disrupted  the radio will prompt you for a 4 digit PIN  code to be entered     The PIN is supplied on your security card  As the pin is  the only means of enabling operation of the radio    place the security card in a safe pla
179. ike this  we certainly hope you ll notify us   Please call us at 1 800 762 2737  or write     Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center  P O  Box 33172  Detroit  MI 48232 5172    In Canada  please call us at 1 800 263 3777  English   or 1 800 263 7854  French   Or  write     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Communication Centre  163 005  1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario L1H 8P7    Service Publications Ordering  Information    Service Manuals    Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  information on engines  transmission  axle  suspension   brakes  electrical  steering  body  etc     RETAIL SELL PRICE   120 00    Transmission  Transaxle  Transfer  Case Unit Repair Manual  This manual provides information on unit repair service    procedures  adjustments  and specifications for GM  transmissions  transaxles  and transfer cases     RETAIL SELL PRICE   50 00    Service Bulletins    Service Bulletins give technical service information  needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars  and trucks  Each bulletin contains instructions to  assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle     In Canada  information pertaining to Product Service  Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General  Motors dealer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE   1 800 463 7483      Owner   s Information    Owner publications are written specifically for owners  and intended to provide basic operational information  about the vehicle  The owner   s manual will include  the Maint
180. ing  GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American  Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines  starburst symbol  Failure to use the recommended  oil can result in engine damage not covered by  your warranty     GM Goodwrench   oil meets all the requirements for  your vehicle     If you are in an area of extreme cold  where the  temperature falls below  20  F     29  C   it is  recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30  synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil  Both will provide  easier cold starting and better protection for your engine  at extremely low temperatures     Engine Oil Additives    Do not add anything to your oil  The recommended oils  with the starburst symbol that meet GM   Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good  performance and engine protection     When to Change Engine Oil   GM Oil Life System     Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know  when to change the engine oil and filter  This is   based on engine revolutions and engine temperature   and not on mileage  Based on driving conditions    the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can  vary considerably  For the oil life system to work  properly  you must reset the system every time the oil is  changed     When the system has calculated that oil life has been  diminished  it will indicate that an oil change is  necessary  A Service Engine Oil message will come on   Change your oil as soon as possible within the next   two times you stop for fuel  It is possible that  if
181. ing continues  pull over  stop  and park your  vehicle right away     If there   s still no sign of steam  you can idle the engine  for three minutes while you   re parked  If you still   have the warning  turn off the engine and get everyone  out of the vehicle until it cools down     You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  help right away     Cooling System                            An electric engine cooling fan under the hood    can start up even when the engine is not  running and can injure you  Keep hands   clothing and tools away from any underhood  electric fan                                         If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling   don   t do anything else until it cools down  The vehicle  should be parked on a level surface                       When you decide it   s safe to lift the hood  you ll see the  electric engine cooling fan  A  and the engine coolant  reservoir  B      The coolant level should be at or above the COLD FILL  mark  If it isn   t  you may have a leak at the pressure  cap or in the radiator hoses  heater hoses  radiator   water pump  or somewhere else in the cooling system     Heater and radiator hoses  and other engine  parts  can be very hot  Do not touch them  If  you do  you can be burned     Do not run the engine if there is a leak  If you  run the engine  it could lose all coolant  That  could cause an engine fire  and you could be  burned  Get any leak fixed before you drive  the vehicle     If 
182. ing over 25 mph  40 km h   Holding the lever in  the RES ACCEL position for longer than one second  causes the vehicle to accelerate     Passing Another Vehicle While Using  Cruise Control    Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed   When you take your foot off the pedal  your vehicle will  slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier     Using Cruise Control on Hills    How well your cruise control will work on hills depends  upon your speed  load  and the steepness of the  hills  When going up steep hills  you may have to step  on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed     When going downhill  you may have to brake or shift to  a lower gear to keep your speed down  Of course   applying the brake takes you out of cruise control  Many  drivers find this to be too much trouble and don   t use  cruise control on steep hills     Ending Cruise Control    Press the ON OFF CANCEL switch twice  The cruise  control symbol and message will turn off     Pressing the ON OFF CANCEL switch once pauses the  cruise control but keeps the system ready and the  speed in memory     A second press turns the system off completely and  wipes the speed memory clear     A third press turns the system back on to ready  without  any speed memory     Turning off the ignition completely turns off cruise  control and wipes the speed memory clear     Cruise control will be canceled if the Traction Control  System  TCS  becomes active  See Traction Control  System  TCS  on page 4 8 
183. ing the side of each reading lamp when the  doors are closed     Trunk Lamp  The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk     Battery Run Down Protection    Your vehicle has a battery run down protection feature  designed to protect your vehicle   s battery     It will activate when there has been no electrical change  for one hour  nothing has been turned on or off  after  the ignition has been turned to ON or ACCESSORIES     At this time  all the interior lamps will turn off  dome   reading  glovebox  trunk     The system is turned on if a door is opened  the vehicle  is unlocked  or the trunk is opened  Once the system   is turned on  the one hour battery protection time resets  to zero and the interior lamps will continue to operate  for another hour  or until the vehicle is locked     The interior lamp system will shut down 10 seconds  after your vehicle is locked using either the key or the  remote key locking system  However  if an interior lamp   such as the dome lamp  has been turned on manually  and is on at the time the vehicle is locked  the   system will not shut down after the normal 10 seconds   The one hour battery protection will be activated  instead     The vehicle   s hazard lights will continue to operate at  all times     Accessory Control    If you want the accessories to operate once the key has  been removed from the ignition  you must turn the  system on by either manually starting an accessory   such as turning the radio on again  This will acti
184. io or cigarette lighter     and use  its fuse  if it is the size you need  Replace it as soon as  you can     Before replacing a fuse  turn every vehicle electrical  switch off     There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle  the  instrument panel fuse block and the engine compartment  fuse block     5 87                 isimini Panel Fuse Blosk  Fuses  Usage  This fuse block is located under the driver   s side of the FLASHER i   instrument panel  The fuses here protect each UNIT Hazard Warning Flashers   separate circuit including headlamps  There are spare POWER   fuses inside the fuse box  If you have electrical WINDOWS Power Window Switches   failure  check here first    He Power Seat Controls    FLASHER UNIT ACC RELAY IGNITION RELAY   POWER WINDOW BLOWER   ramen   seen    annaa e tte    SPARE Spare  INSTRUMENT LLU Fain DOOR LOOKS  LAMPS   spare   mium INSTRUMENT  n i z   Fs  Hi      a    na en   f   i RELAY ILLUM  PARK  E       Instrument Cluster Brightness  Controls  Parking Lamps        LIGHTING       BATTERY         MAN     _ LAMPS  i STOP LAMPS   Stop Lamps    SPARE   ica a Interior light Controls    2  K  3  N  4  WA  5   6  fA  8    BATTERY     POWER WINDOWS HORN ACC SOCKET  HAZARD Hazard Warning Flashers       A WARNING   SPARE Spare   HORN Horn   IGNITION Ignition Switch       INSTRUMENT ee    ILLUM  Instrument Panel Lighting    URN SIGNAL   Turn Signal Lamp    5 88    ACC HTR SUB WOOFER AA  CONT INST  Heater Controls  Trip Computer  amp  AMPLIFIER Sub Woofer and 
185. ip without further help  contact  the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling  1 800 762 2737  In Canada  contact GM of Canada  Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling  1 800 263 3777  English  or 1 800 263 7854  French      7 2    We encourage you to call the toll free number in order  to give your inquiry prompt attention  Please have   the following information available to give the Customer  Assistance Representative       Vehicle Identification Number  This is available from  the vehicle registration or title  or the plate at the  top left of the instrument panel and visible through  the windshield        Dealership name and location    Vehicle delivery date and present mileage    When contacting Pontiac  please remember that your  concern will likely be resolved at a dealer   s facility  That  is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you   have a concern     STEP THREE  Both General Motors and your dealer  are committed to making sure you are completely  satisfied with your new vehicle  However  if you continue  to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure  outlined in Steps One and Two  you should file with the  BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional   rights you may have  Canadian owners refer to your  Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for  information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration  Plan  CAMVAP      The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  administered by the Council of Better Business   
186. ips safer and more enjoyable     Keep your vehicle in good shape  Check all fluid  levels and also the brakes  tires  cooling system  and transmission  These parts can work hard  on mountain roads     Know how to go down hills  The most important  thing to know is this  let your engine do some of  the slowing down  Shift to a lower gear when you go  down a steep or long hill     If you do not shift down  your brakes could get  so hot that they would not work well  You    would then have poor braking or even none  going down a hill  You could crash  Shift down  to let your engine assist your brakes on a  steep downhill slope        Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL  N  or with the  ignition off is dangerous  Your brakes will have  to do all the work of slowing down  They could    get so hot that they would not work well  You  would then have poor braking or even none  going down a hill  You could crash  Always  have your engine running and your vehicle in  gear when you go downhill        Know how to go uphill  You may want to shift down  to a lower gear  The lower gears help cool your  engine and transmission  and you can climb the   hill better    Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane  roads in hills or mountains  Do not swing wide   or cut across the center of the road  Drive at speeds  that let you stay in your own lane    As you go over the top of a hill  be alert  There  could be something in your lane  like a stalled car or  an accident    You may see highway signs 
187. isplay  Press the MODE button to continue     2 37    4 NOTES    2 38       Section 3 Instrument Panel  Instrument Panel Overview                     0   eee 3 2 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light              3 28  Hazard Warning Flashers                 eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage                  5 3 28  Other Warning Devices              cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 4 Malfunction Indicator Lamp                e eeeeeeeeeeee 3 29  OM saas Mew synch Meee ena Guida cawtinenu ert 3 4 Oil Pressure Light smcera innean 3 32  TI EAN EEN sesh otter sesnec a a a 3 5 Change Engine Oil Light                   eee 3 33  Turn Signal Multifunction Lever s es 3 5 Security Light               ccceeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeenes 3 33  Exterior LAMPS  ensai aE 3 12 Fog Lamp Light 222 aar bedre ens 3 33  I  terior LAMPS cees siiani aa ai 3 15 Highbeam On Light secsi siiicar neesii saia 3 33  Accessory Power Outlets                eceeeeeeeneee ees 3 17 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light             3 34  Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter                  008 3 18 Service Vehicle Soon Light                  eeeeeeee ee 3 34  Climate Controls scenes 3 19 Fuel Gage       eeeeee teeter tet tee tees tte te tettetiees 3 35  Climate Control System    a   an 3 19 Trip Computer ect ccs rests Laces de 3 36  Outlet Adjustment                  cceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 Audio System s  css 3 42  Warning Lights  Gages  and Indicators              3 23 Setting the Time             
188. king and you  should see your vehicle dealer  The Traction Ctrl Off  message is displayed for two seconds  The message  then reverts to the original trip computer display   with a small TRAC OFF symbol on the right  The symbol  will remain until the problem is fixed  See Traction  Control System  TCS  on page 4 8     3 41    Audio System s     Notice  Before you add any sound equipment to  your vehicle     like a tape player  CB radio  mobile  telephone or two way radio     be sure you can   add what you want  If you can  it   s very important to  do it properly  Added sound equipment may  interfere with the operation of your vehicle   s engine   radio or other systems  and even damage them   Your vehicle   s systems may interfere with the  operation of sound equipment that has been added  improperly    So  before adding sound equipment  check with  your dealer and be sure to check federal rules  covering mobile radio and telephone units     Your audio system has been designed to operate easily  and to give years of listening pleasure  You will get   the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with  it first  Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle   find out what your audio system can do  and how to  operate all of its controls to be sure you are getting   the most out of the advanced engineering that went   into it     3 42    Setting the Time  When the time is displayed and the radio is on  do the  following     1  Press the TIME button for more than two 
189. l flash  and the  radio will produce a beep  if beeps are turned on    See    Confirmation Beeps    later in this section for  information about turning beeps on and off  You can  now remove the CD  Press the LOAD button to cancel  the eject function     If the CD is not removed  after 25 seconds  the CD will  be automatically pulled back into the player  If you   try to push the CD back into the player before the   25 second time period is complete  the player will sense  an error and will try to eject the CD several times  before stopping     Do not repeatedly press the EJECT button to eject a  CD after you have tried to push it in manually  The  player   s 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of  eject  which will cause the player to not eject the CD  until the 25 second time period has elapsed     Once the player stops and the CD is ejected  remove  the CD  After removing the CD  press the ON OFF  button off and then on again  This will clear the  CD sensing feature and enable CDs to be loaded into  the player again     CD Messages    CD ERROR PLAY  The CD cannot be read  The CD is  dirty  scratched  wet  or upside down     CD ERROR MECH  Mechanism   If this message  appears on the display  it could be for one of the  following reasons       The CD is stuck in the player and cannot be  played  loaded  or ejected      It is very hot  When the temperature returns to  normal  the CD should play      You are driving on a very rough road  When the  road becomes smoot
190. lation pressure  shown on the tire placard  See Inflation   Tire Pressure  on page 5 58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30     Radial Ply tire  A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords  that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the  centerline of the tread     Rim  A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire  beads are seated     Sidewall  The portion of a tire between the tread and  the bead     Speed Rating  An alphanumeric code assigned to a  tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire  can operate     Traction  The friction between the tire and the road  surface  The amount of grip provided     Tread  The portion of a tire that comes into contact  with the road     Treadwear Indicators  Narrow bands  sometimes  called    wear bars     that show across the tread of a tire  when only 2 32 inch of tread remains  See When It   Is Time for New Tires on page 5 64     Tread Width  The width of the tire   s tread     5 57    UTQGS  Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards  a tire  information system that provides consumers with  ratings for a tire   s traction  temperature and treadwear   Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using  government testing procedures  The ratings are molded  into the sidewall of the tire  See Uniform Tire Quality  Grading on page 5 66     Vehicle Capacity Weight  The number of designated  seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds  68 kg    plus the rated cargo load  See Loading Your Vehicle on  page 4 30     Vehicle Maxim
191. le Key Removal    Before leaving a manual transmission vehicle  fully press  the clutch pedal in  move the shift lever into   REVERSE  R   and firmly apply the parking brake  Once  the shift lever has been placed in REVERSE  R  with  the clutch pedal pressed in  you can turn the ignition key  to LOCK  remove the key  and release the clutch     Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust       Engine exhaust can kill  It contains the gas  carbon monoxide  CO   which you can not see  or smell  It can cause unconsciousness and  death   You might have exhaust coming in if   Your exhaust system sounds strange or  different   Your vehicle gets rusty underneath     Your vehicle was damaged in a collision   Your vehicle was damaged when driving    over high points on the road or over road  debris     Repairs were not done correctly   Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  modified improperly   If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into  your vehicle     Drive it only with all the windows down to  blow out any CO  and    Have your vehicle fixed immediately     Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust    parts under your vehicle and ignite  Do not  park over papers  leaves  dry grass or other  things that can burn        2 27    Running Your Engine While You  Are Parked    It is better not to park with the engine running  But if  you ever have to  here are some things to know     Idling the engine with the climate control  system off could allow dangerous exhaust into  your vehi
192. lease ici re re beeches E gee 5 11  gg Fo  d dis este seen cnet r duane test anmpedes enenmeneeaae ack 3 4  How to Add Coolant to the Coolant   Surge TaK  nenian iiin oia Eed 5 33  How to Add Fluid o   on 5 22  5 23  How to Check             ccceeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 20  5 23  5 60  How to Check and Add Fluid                  0eeeeeeeee 5 24    How to Check Power Steering Fluid                    5 36    How to Detect a Tamper Condition                 0 2 15  How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter         5 18  How to Use This Manual                 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees ii  How to Wear Safety Belts Properly                5 1 12  Hydraul ClutChi bis soon isse enn 5 24  FYOFODIANING  rr een EU Nee rr 4 18  If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine            5 29  If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine                 5 28  If the Light is Flashing                   e eseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 30  If the Light Is On Steady    a   an 3 30  If You Are Caught in a Blizzard              cee 4 26  If You Are Stuck in Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow         4 28  IGNITION OFF COURTESY LAMP                 066 2 36  Ignition POSITONS sss arsi ais histones 2 16  IMAM ODF ER 2 rr gaea nA AE 2 12  Immobilizer Operation            X     ssssseeeeeerererenenee 2 13  Infants and Young Children  Restraints                 1 28  Inflation   Tire Pressure aseeseen 5 58  INST FUEL 3s ere acceler a den bats 3 38  Instrument Panel   CIUSIO  522 as anid E a Madea dias 3 24   OVERVIEW    ceccaie cecuneMrsmacteta
193. les from both vehicles  do  the following     1  Disconnect the black negative       cable from the  vehicle that had the dead battery     2  Disconnect the black negative       cable from the  vehicle with the good battery     3  Disconnect the red positive     cable from the  vehicle with the good battery     4  Disconnect the red positive     cable from the other  vehicle        Jumper Cable Removal    A  Heavy  Unpainted Metal Engine Part  B  Good Battery  C  Dead Battery    5 46    Bulb Replacement  For the type of bulbs  see Replacement Bulbs on    page 5 50  For any bulb changing procedure not listed  in this section  contact your dealer     Halogen Bulbs    Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside    and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb   You or others could be injured  Be sure to read  and follow the instructions on the bulb  package        Headlamps   To gain access if replacing a front bulb on the   passenger s side of the vehicle  do the following   1  Undo the battery clamp     2  Remove the battery retaining plate and slide the  battery out of the way toward the rear of the  vehicle     3  If your vehicle is equipped with a larger battery  the  battery terminals must be disconnected and the  battery completely removed from the vehicle     After replacing the bulb  remember to replace and  connect the battery     To gain access if replacing a front bulb on the driver s  side of the vehicle  do the following     1  Remove the four screws in the radiator 
194. lever away  from you        Outside Power Mirrors    The controls for the power  mirrors are located on the  driver s door armrest     You can adjust the angle of the mirrors when the  ignition is turned on     Move the selector switch located above the four way  control pad to choose the right or left mirror  To adjust a  mirror  use the four way control pad to move the   mirror in the direction that you want it to go     2 29    Outside Convex Mirror    Your passenger   s side mirror is convex  A convex  mirror   s surface is curved so you can see more from the  driver   s seat     A convex mirror can make things  like other  vehicles  look farther away than they really are     If you cut too sharply into the right lane  you  could hit a vehicle on your right  Check your  inside mirror or glance over your shoulder  before changing lanes     2 30       Storage Areas    Glove Box    A glovebox is provided on the passenger side of the  instrument panel     A specific key is provided solely to lock and unlock the  glovebox  For security  the master key is designed  not to operate the glovebox lock  See Keys on page 2 2     To lock  insert the glovebox key  turn clockwise and  then withdraw  To unlock  insert the glovebox key and  turn counterclockwise     To open  pull the handle to the left and pull the glove  box door down until it stops and is fully open     Cupholder s     The two cupholders are located in front of the center  console storage area     Front Storage Area    
195. ling  do not you and others     remove the nozzle  Shut off the flow of fuel by  shutting off the pump or by notifying the  station attendant  Leave the area immediately     e Dispense gasoline only into approved  containers       Do not fill a container while it is inside a  vehicle  in a vehicle   s trunk  pickup bed or  on any surface other than the ground   Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the  inside of the fill opening before operating       Notice  If you need a new fuel cap  be sure to get  the right type  Your dealer can get one for you    If you get the wrong type  it may not fit properly  seine  This aa cause veut mallunetion indicar lamp to the nozzle  Contact should be maintained  light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions until the filling is complete  i  system  See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on   Do not smoke while pumping gasoline   page 3 29        Checking Things Under  the Hood    An electric fan under the hood can start up    and injure you even when the engine is not  running  Keep hands  clothing and tools away  from any underhood electric fan        Things that burn can get on hot engine parts  and start a fire  These include liquids like fuel     oil  coolant  brake fluid  windshield washer and  other fluids  and plastic or rubber  You or   others could be burned  Be careful not to drop  or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine        Hood Release    To open the hood  do the following     1  Pull the handle located  under the instr
196. ll  automatically come on     Dome Lamp  The dome lamp has three positions     ON  In this position  the dome lamp is always on     DOOR  In this position  the light automatically comes  on when a door is opened  It will turn off 30 seconds  after the last door is closed  If the ignition is turned on   the light turns off immediately unless a door is open     OFF  In this position  the dome lamp is always off  even  when a door is opened     The dome lamp can be set to remain on for a preset  amount of time after the ignition has been turned  off  See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 32     Entry Lighting    The entry lighting feature illuminates the interior of the  vehicle before you enter  The interior lamps will come on  for 40 seconds when you unlock the doors using the  remote key buttons and the ignition is in LOCK    After 40 seconds have elapsed  the interior lamps will  turn off  The lamps will turn off before 40 seconds have  elapsed if you do the following       Lock all doors using the remote key buttons     Lock the doors manually using the lock knob     When any door is opened  entry lighting is canceled   The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened  and turn off when all doors are closed  The interior  lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors  have been closed if they have not been locked     3 15    Front Reading Lamps    Your vehicle has reading lamps located in the dome  lamp  The lamps can be turned on and off manually by  press
197. ll engage the child restraint locking feature    If this happens  just let the belt go back all the way   and start again     1 20    Rear Seat Passengers    It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle  up  Accident statistics show that unbelted people in  the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those  who are wearing safety belts     Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be  thrown out of the vehicle in a crash  And they can strike  others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts     Rear Seat Passenger Positions    aii    e       Lap Shoulder Belt    All rear seating positions have lap shoulder belts  Here  is how to wear one properly     1  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Do not let it get twisted   The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  across you very quickly  If this happens  let the belt  go back slightly to unlock it  Then pull the belt  across you more slowly        2  Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks     Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure     When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way    it will lock  If it does  let it go back all the way and  start again  If the belt is not long enough  see  Safety Belt Extender on page 1 25  Make sure the  release button on the buckle is positioned so   you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt  quickly if you ever had to        3  To make the lap part tight  pull down on the buckle    end of the belt as you pull up o
198. lowing to the Roadside Assistance  Representative       Your name  home address  and home telephone  number      Telephone number of your location      Location of the vehicle    Model  year  color  and license plate number      Mileage  Vehicle Identification Number and delivery  date of the vehicle      Description of the problem    While we hope you never have the occasion to use our  service  it is added security while traveling for you   and your family  Remember  we are only a phone call  away  Pontiac Roadside Assistance  1 800 ROADSIDE   762 3743   text telephone  TTY  users  call  1 888 889 2438     Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or  reimbursement to an owner or driver when  in Pontiac   s  judgement  the claims become excessive in frequency  or type of occurrence     Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the  coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty   Buick reserves the right to make any changes or  discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any  time without notification     Courtesy Transportation    Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its  offering of motor vehicles  To enhance your ownership  experience  we and our participating dealers are  proud to offer Courtesy Transportation  a customer  support program for new vehicles     The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail  purchase lease customers in conjunction with the  Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New  Vehicle Limited Warrant
199. ls you the gross weight capacity   of your vehicle  called the Gross Vehicle Weight   Rating  GVWR   The GVWR includes the weight of the  MED BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP vehicle  all occupants  fuel and cargo  Never exceed    J DATE GVWR GAWRFRT GAWR RR the GVWR for your vehicle  or the Gross Axle Weight   Rating  GAWR  for either the front or rear axle        THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI   CABLE U S  FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE  SAFETY  BUMPER  AND THEFT PREVENTION  STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF i g  MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE  Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  GVWR  or either the maximum front or rear          Pi GAWR  If you do  parts on your vehicle can  break  and it can change the way your vehicle  handles  These could cause you to lose  control and crash  Also  overloading can  shorten the life of your vehicle           4 34    Towing a Trailer    Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a  trailer    Things you put inside your vehicle can strike   and injure people in a sudden stop or turn  or   in a crash       Put things in the rear area of your vehicle   Try to spread the weight evenly  If you  have fold down rear seats  you will find  four anchors on the back wall of your  trunk  You can use these anchors to tie  down lighter loads  They are not strong    enough for heavy things  however  so put  them as far forward as you can in the  trunk or rear area    Never stack heavier things  like suitcases   inside the vehicle so that some of them  a
200. ly with the windows closed in warm or  hot weather        i Tie    FIN  gy          Power Windows    Use the switches located  between the seats to  operate the windows              To raise the window  pull up the switch  To lower the  window  push down the switch     The switches will remain operational when the ignition is  turned off for 15 minutes  while the doors remain  closed  When the doors are opened  the power windows  are deactivated  and will not operate until the ignition   is turned on again     Express Down Window    The window switch has an express down feature  Hold  the switch down for more than half a second and   then release it  To interrupt the express down feature   move the switch up or down again     Sun Visors    To help block out glare  pull the sun visors down  Pull  on the inside edges of the sun visors to swing them from  the front windshield to the side window     Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors    Both the driver and passenger   s side sun visors have  lighted vanity mirrors     Raise the cover on the top of the sun visor to expose  the vanity mirror  The lights at either side of the  vanity mirror automatically turn on and off when the  cover is opened and closed     Theft Deterrent Systems    Theft Deterrent System    Vehicle theft is big business  especially in some cities   Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent  features  we know that nothing we put on it can make it  impossible to steal     Immobilizer    This device complies
201. mbol or  sometimes both ways     If a Service Error Contact Dealer message appears on  the trip computer display while driving  a fault in the  instrument panel is indicated  Contact your dealer   as soon as possible  This message will remain until the  MODE button on the trip computer is pressed     3 23    Instrument Panel Cluster    The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running  You ll know how  fast you re going  how much fuel you re using  and many other things you ll need to drive safely and economically     co    Wy  60 80 D  R     Q  T s   174  BRAKE se                  3 24    Speedometer    The speedometer shows vehicle speed in both miles  per hour  mph  and kilometers per hour  km h      Tachometer    The tachometer shows engine speed in revolutions  per minute  rpm      For automatic transmission vehicle   s  under wide open  throttle acceleration  when the accelerator pedal is  pushed flat to the floor  it is possible that the tachometer  needle may briefly enter the lower end of the  tachometer   s red zone just prior to automatically  upshifting into a higher gear  This is normal during   wide open throttle acceleration and will not harm   the engine     Notice  If you operate the engine with the  tachometer in the shaded warning area  your vehicle  could be damaged  and the damages would not   be covered by your warranty  Do not operate   the engine with the tachometer in the shaded  warning area     Safety B
202. n the ground  and     dolly towing    which is towing your vehicle with   two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a  device known as a    dolly        Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of  its wheels on the ground  If your vehicle must be    towed  see    Towing Your Vehicle    earlier in this section     4 30    Loading Your Vehicle    It is very important to know how much weight your  vehicle can carry  This weight is called the vehicle  capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants   cargo and all nonfactory installed options  Two labels  on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly  carry  the Tire and Loading Information label and the  Certification label     Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  GVWR  or either the maximum front or rear    GAWR  If you do  parts on your vehicle can  break  and it can change the way your vehicle  handles  These could cause you to lose  control and crash  Also  overloading can  shorten the life of your vehicle        Tire and Loading Information Label    TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION    SEATING CAPACITY   TOTAL   FRONT   CENTER    The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs   m A    ORIGINAL COLD TIRE   TIRE SIZE INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER   S  cae RR  ee RER  Cc    A  Vehicle Capacity Weight       The Tire and Loading Information label shows the  seating capacity and the total weight your vehicle can  properly carry  This weight is called the vehicle
203. n the ignition to  ON to shut off the alarm     Leaving Your Vehicle    If you are leaving your vehicle  make sure that you lock  it and take the keys with you     Trunk    It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid  open because carbon monoxide  CO  gas can  come into your vehicle  You can not see or  smell CO  It can cause unconsciousness and  even death  If you must drive with the trunk lid  open or if electrical wiring or other cable  connections must pass through the seal    between the body and the trunk lid     Make sure all other windows are shut        Turn the fan on your heating or cooling  system to its highest speed and select the  control setting that will force outside air  into your vehicle  See Climate Control  System in the Index   If you have air outlets on or under the  instrument panel  open them all the way     See Engine Exhaust on page 2 27        Trunk Lock    To unlock the trunk  press the open trunk symbol on the  key  The button on the key must be pressed for more  than half a second and travelling speed must be   less than 12 mph  20 km h  for the signal to work  When  the trunk is unlocked  it can then be fully opened from  the outside  See Remote Keyless Entry System  Operation on page 2 5 for more information     After partly opening the trunk lid  gas struts automatically  take over to lift and hold the trunk lid in the fully open  position  The trunk locks automatically when pushed  shut  so be careful not to leave keys in the trunk  The
204. n the shoulder part   1 21                                  Wea  Wo    LAs  SA    A     gt        y  b   f     A  127  aA    yp    5 o  D             yy N  A      D                       1 22    The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this  applies force to the strong pelvic bones  And you would  be less likely to slide under the lap belt  If you slid  under it  the belt would apply force at your abdomen   This could cause serious or even fatal injuries  The  shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across  the chest  These parts of the body are best able to take  belt restraining forces     The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a  crash  or if you pull the belt very quickly out of  the retractor     You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt    is too loose  In a crash  you would move  forward too much  which could increase injury   The shoulder belt should fit against your body           To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle     Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for  Children and Small Adults    Rear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safety  belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  booster seats and for small adults  When installed on a  shoulder belt  the comfort guide better positions the  belt away from the neck and head     There is one guide for each passenger position in the  rear seat  To provide added safety belt comfort for  children who have o
205. nal is a small  rectangle on top of the dashboard  in the center  The  receiver is also used to measure sunlight  It is important  that the receiver is clean  not covered  and that there  are no metal objects close by  as this may block   the signals     LOCK  Press this button on the key to lock all the  doors  disable the engine  and set the alarm  The  vehicle   s turn signals will briefly flash     If you prefer to have the turn signals flash accompanied  by the horn sounding  the LOCK feature can be  changed  See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 32     The LOCK button on the key will not work if the ignition  is turned on or if the driver   s door is open     UNLOCK  Press this button on the key to unlock the  doors  The turn signals will flash twice  and the horn will  chirp twice  if selected through vehicle personalization   The interior light will also turn on for a short time  If  UNLOCK is pressed once  the driver   s door will unlock   If UNLOCK is pressed a second time  or is held   down for more than half a second  all the doors will  unlock  If you prefer to have all the doors unlock with a  single press  the unlock feature can be changed to  unlock all doors  See    Two Stage Unlock    under Vehicle  Personalization on page 2 32     If the lock system is overloaded as a result of repeated  use in a short time interval  the power supply is cut   off for about 30 seconds  The door lock system   has been designed to make the vehicle horn chirp  rapidly five time
206. nd Maintenance  Footnotes on page 6 8 for further information     Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can  be dangerous  In trying to do some jobs  you  can be seriously injured  Do your own    maintenance work only if you have the  required know how and the proper tools and  equipment for the job  If you have any doubt   see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a  qualified technician do the work        Some maintenance services can be complex  So   unless you are technically qualified and have the  necessary equipment  you should have your GM  Goodwrench dealer do these jobs     When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your  service needs  you will know that GM trained and  supported service technicians will perform the work  using genuine GM parts     If you want to get service information  see Service  Publications Ordering Information on page 7 11     Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells you what  should be checked  when to check it and what you   can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good  condition     The proper replacement parts  fluids and lubricants to  use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  on page 6 13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement  Parts on page 6 15  When your vehicle is serviced   make sure these are used  All parts should be replaced  and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone  else drives the vehicle  We recommend the use of  genuine GM parts     Scheduled Maintenance    When the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on  i
207. nd turn off the engine as soon as possible     Malfunction Indicator Lamp  Check Engine Light    Your vehicle is equipped  with a computer which  monitors operation of the  fuel  ignition and emission  control systems     This system is called OBD II  On Board  Diagnostics Second Generation  and is intended to  assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the  life of the vehicle  helping to produce a cleaner  environment  The check engine light comes on to  indicate that there is a problem and service is required   Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system  before any problem is apparent  This may prevent more  serious damage to your vehicle  This system is also  designed to assist your service technician in correctly  diagnosing any malfunction     Notice  If you keep driving your vehicle with this  light on  after a while  your emission controls   may not work as well  your fuel economy may not  be as good and your engine may not run as  smoothly  This could lead to costly repairs that may  not be covered by your warranty     Notice  Modifications made to the engine   transmission  exhaust  intake or fuel system of your  vehicle or replacement tires that do not match   your vehicle   s original tires can affect your vehicle   s  emission controls and may cause this light to   come on  Modifications to these systems could lead  to costly repairs not covered by your warranty    This may also result in a failure to pass a required  Emission Inspection Maintenan
208. nents  from working as they should  The repairs would not  be covered by your warranty  Check with your  dealer before adding electrical equipment     When adding electrical equipment  be sure to follow the  proper installation instructions included with the  electrical equipment you install     Notice  Improper use of the power outlet can cause  damage not covered by your warranty  Do not   hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket  from the plug because the power outlets are  designed for accessory power plugs only     3 17    Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter    Notice  If you put papers or other flammable items  in the ashtray  hot cigarettes or other smoking  materials could ignite them and possibly damage  your vehicle  Never put flammable items in the  ashtray     Ashtray    If your vehicle has this option  the front ashtray is  located in the center of the instrument panel under the  audio controls  The rear ashtray is located at the   rear of the center console  To use the ashtray  push the  cover inwards and the ashtray will slide open     To empty the ashtray  open it and grip it at the  depressions located on each side  Then pull the  ashtray out     Cigarette Lighter    Notice  Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is  heating will not allow the lighter to back away from  the heating element when it is hot  Damage from  overheating may occur to the lighter or heating  element  or a fuse could be blown  Do not hold a  cigarette lighter in while it is heating 
209. ng Your Vehicle 1    seere 4 30  Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads                    4 16 Towing a Trailer error isine 4 35  GITY IDIIVING e arado E 4 19    Your Driving  the Road  and  Your Vehicle    Defensive Driving    The best advice anyone can give about driving is  Drive  defensively     Please start with a very important safety device in your  vehicle  Buckle up  See Safety Belts  They Are for  Everyone on page 1 6     Defensive driving really means    be ready for anything      On city streets  rural roads or freeways  it means     always expect the unexpected        Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to  be careless and make mistakes  Anticipate what  they might do  Be ready for their mistakes     Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of  accidents  Yet they are common  Allow enough following  distance  It is the best defensive driving maneuver  in  both city and rural driving  You never know when   the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn  suddenly     Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on  the driving task  Anything that distracts from the  driving task     such as concentrating on a cellular  telephone call  reading  or reaching for something on    4 2    the floor     makes proper defensive driving more  difficult and can even cause a collision  with resulting  injury  Ask a passenger to help do things like this  or  pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself   These simple defensive driving 
210. ng at high speed when shifting your vehicle     2 19    DRIVE  D   This is the most effective position for  normal or freeway driving  This position gives maximum  fuel efficiency  as the transmission can choose the  appropriate gear  1 through 4  for the existing load and  driving conditions    After selecting DRIVE  D  from PARK  P  or   NEUTRAL  N   pause for a moment before accelerating   to allow the transmission to engage the forward gear   Use this position when towing     THIRD  3   This position is also used for normal driving   However  it offers more power and lower fuel economy  than DRIVE  D   Here are some times you might choose  THIRD  3  instead of DRIVE  D        When driving on hilly  winding roads       When towing a trailer  so there is less shifting  between gears     e When going down a steep hill     2 20    SECOND  2   This position gives you more power but  lower fuel economy than THIRD  3   You can use  SECOND  2  on hills  It can help control your speed as  you go down steep mountain roads  but then you  would also want to use your brakes off and on     FIRST  1   This position gives you even more power  but lower fuel economy than SECOND  2   You can use  it on very steep hills  or in deep snow or mud  If the  shift lever is put in FIRST  1   the transmission   won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly  enough     Remember to move the shift lever back to DRIVE D  so  that the transmission again upshifts into higher gears   Even 
211. ng when driving on a smooth road  your wheels  may need to be rebalanced     5 67    Wheel Replacement    Replace any wheel that is bent  cracked or badly rusted  or corroded  If wheel nuts keep coming loose  the  wheel  wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced   If the wheel leaks air  replace it  except some  aluminum wheels  which can sometimes be repaired    See your dealer if any of these conditions exist     Your dealer will Know the kind of wheel you need     Each new wheel should have the same load carrying  capacity  diameter  width  offset and be mounted  the same way as the one it replaces     If you need to replace any of your wheels  wheel bolts  or wheel nuts  replace them only with new GM  original equipment parts  This way  you will be sure to  have the right wheel  wheel bolts and wheel nuts   for your vehicle     5 68    Using the wrong replacement wheels  wheel  bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be  dangerous  It could affect the braking and    handling of your vehicle  make your tires lose  air and make you lose control  You could have  a collision in which you or others could be  injured  Always use the correct wheel  wheel  bolts and wheel nuts for replacement        Notice  The wrong wheel can also cause problems  with bearing life  brake cooling  speedometer or  odometer calibration  headlamp aim  bumper height   vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain  clearance to the body and chassis     See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 71 for m
212. ngers  Use the defrost mode to   remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly     Turn the right dial to select the defog or defrost modes     NA  Defog   This mode directs the air to the windshield  and to the floor outlets  When you select this mode   the system turns off recirculation automatically    The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the  defog mode  Do not drive the vehicle until all the  windows are clear     To help clear the side windows quickly while using air  conditioning  do the following     1  Select the bi level mode    2  Select the highest fan speed   3  Select A C    4  Select the temperature     P  Defrost   This mode directs the air to the  windshield  In this mode  the system will automatically  force outside air into your vehicle and run the  air conditioning compressor  Recirculation cannot be  selected while in the defrost mode     To help clear the windshield quickly  do the following   1  Select the defrost mode   2  Select the highest temperature   3  Select the highest fan speed     Rear Window Defogger    The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  remove fog or frost from the rear window     Qy  Rear Defogger   Press this button on the right  dial to turn the rear window defogger on or off  An  indicator light in the button will come on to let your know  that the rear window defogger is activated  Be sure to  clear as much snow from the rear window as possible     The rear window defogger will turn off about 15 minut
213. nserted      Starting and Operating Your  Vehicle    New Vehicle Break In    Notice  Your vehicle does not need an elaborate     break in     But it will perform better in the long run  if you follow these guidelines     e Keep your speed at 55 mph  88 km h  or less for  the first 500 miles  805 km        Do not drive at any one speed     fast or  slow     for the first 500 miles  805 km   Do not  make full throttle starts       Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles   322 km  or so  During this time your new brake  linings are not yet broken in  Hard stops with new  linings can mean premature wear and earlier  replacement  Follow this breaking in guideline  every time you get new brake linings     2 15    Ignition Positions    With the key in the ignition switch  you can turn it to  three different positions        A  LOCK and ACCESSORY   This is the only position  from which you can insert or remove the key  When   the key is inserted and is in this position  all accessories   electrical systems  and engine are off  If the key is  cycled back to this position the accessories will remain  on until the key is removed  Once the key is removed  the accessories will turn off  If the key is left inserted in  this position  a chime will sound when the driver   s    2 16    door is opened to remind you the key has been left in  the ignition  The key can only be turned to this position if  the vehicle   s automatic transmission is in PARK  P     To help guard against theft 
214. nt after three to   six drinks  in one hour   Of course  as we have seen  it  depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks  and  how quickly the person drinks them     But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of  0 10 percent  Research shows that the driving skills   of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching  0 05 percent  and that the effects are worse at night  All  drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent   Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision  increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of   0 05 percent or above  A driver with a BAC level of  0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  collision  At a BAC level of 0 10 percent  the chance   of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater  at a  level of 0 15 percent  the chance is 25 times greater     The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  in one drink  No amount of coffee or number of cold  showers will speed that up     I will be careful    is not the  right answer  What if there is an emergency  a need   to take sudden action  as when a child darts into    the street  A person with even a moderate BAC might  not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the  collision     There is something else about drinking and driving that  many people do not know  Medical research shows  that alcohol in a person   s system can make crash  injuries worse  especially injuries to the brain  spinal  cord or heart  This means that when anyone who
215. o and 180 seconds  the default   is one second  Press the MODE button to continue   See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12     HEADLIGHTS APPROACH TIME    This option is used to adjust the headlights approach  illumination time delay  Use the up or down arrows   to adjust the delay setting between zero and   90 seconds  the default is 30 seconds  Press the MODE  button to continue  See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12     AUTO HEADLIGHTS SENSITIVITY    This option is used to adjust the automatic headlights  on sensitivity  Use the up or down arrows to adjust  the sensitivity setting to Early  Normal or Late  the  default is Normal  Press the MODE button to continue   See Exterior Lamps on page 3 12     2 36    COURTESY LAMP TIMEOUT    This option is used to adjust the length of time that the  interior courtesy lamp remains illuminated after   opening a door or unlocking the vehicle at night  Use  the up or down arrows to adjust the time setting between  zero and 255 seconds  the default is 30 seconds    Press the MODE button to continue     IGNITION OFF COURTESY LAMP    This option is used to adjust the length of time that the  interior courtesy lamp remains illuminated after the  ignition is turned off  at night only  Use the up or down  arrows to adjust the time setting between zero and  255 seconds  the default is 30 seconds  Press the  MODE button to continue     TWO STAGE UNLOCK    This option is used to enable or disable the two stage  door unlock function  Use the up or down arrow
216. o be increased     See    Options Menu Adjustment    later in this section to  adjust DDL     Options Menu Adjustment  Confirmation beeps  SDV  and DDL can all be adjusted  by doing the following    1  Turn off the radio by pressing the OFF button     2  Press the ON button and pushbutton 1 at the same  time until Options Menu appears on the display     3  Push the AUDIO knob until the correct option  appears on the display    4  Turn the AUDIO knob to adjust the setting of the  option being displayed    5  Push the AUDIO knob to select another option or  press the OFF button to exit the options menu   Your selection will be saved    If no buttons are pressed or turned for eight    seconds  the radio will automatically exit the menu  and the radio will turn on     Master Reset    Your radio has a reset feature that allows you to return  certain settings back to the factory default settings    Use this feature when adjustments have been made that  affect the sound quality or operation of the radio and  you are unsure of how to return to the original settings     This master reset feature will reset the following     Bass  Treble  Fade  and Balance    Confirmation beeps to on    SDV to setting 2  e DDL to on     EQ to off   To perform the master reset  do the following   1  Turn off the radio by pressing the OFF button     2  Press the ON button and pushbutton 4 at the same  time for about two seconds   After the radio has finished resetting  the radio will  turn on with the or
217. old  Tire Inflation Pressure for High Speed Operation    Occupant and Occupant and  Cargo Weight  Cargo Weight     470 Ibs   210 kg  or less   Up to 740 Ibs   330 kg    Vehicle Capacity    Wegry    Front  36 psi 36 psi 39 psi 44 psi   250 kPa   250 kPa   270 kPa   300 kPa   When you end high speed driving  return the tires to the    cold inflation pressure shown on the tire and loading  information label     5 61    Tire Inspection and Rotation    Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles   8 000 to 13 000 km      Any time you notice unusual wear  rotate your tires as  soon as possible and check wheel alignment  Also  check for damaged tires or wheels  See When It Is Time  for New Tires on page 5 64 and Wheel Replacement   on page 5 68 for more information     The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more  uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle  The first rotation  is the most important  See Scheduled Maintenance   on page 6 4     5 62       When rotating non directional tires  always use the  correct rotation pattern shown here     After the tires have been rotated  adjust the front and  rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and  Loading Information label  Make certain that all wheel  nuts are properly tightened  See    Wheel Nut Torque     under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 92        Rust or dirt on a wheel  or on the parts to  which it is fastened  can make wheel nuts  become loose after a time  The wheel could  come off and cause an acc
218. on mountains that  warn of special problems  Examples are long  grades  passing or no passing zones  a falling rocks  area or winding roads  Be alert to these and take  appropriate action     4 23    Winter Driving    Here are some tips for winter driving     Have your vehicle in good shape for winter       You may want to put winter emergency supplies in  your trunk     Also see Tires on page 5 51     4 24       Include an ice scraper  a small brush or broom  a  supply of windshield washer fluid  a rag  some winter  outer clothing  a small shovel  a flashlight  a red  cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles  And  if  you will be driving under severe conditions  include a  small bag of sand  a piece of old carpet or a couple of  burlap bags to help provide traction  Be sure you  properly secure these items in your vehicle     Driving on Snow or Ice    Most of the time  those places where your tires meet  the road probably have good traction     However  if there is snow or ice between your tires and  the road  you can have a very slippery situation  You  will have a lot less traction or    grip    and will need to be  very careful        What is the worst time for this     Wet ice     Very cold  snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on  But wet  ice can be even more trouble because it may offer   the least traction of all  You can get wet ice when it is  about freezing  32  F  0  C  and freezing rain begins   to fall  Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt
219. on your vehicle  you could scratch  the glass and or cause damage to the rear window  defogger and the integrated radio antenna  When  cleaning the glass on your vehicle  use only a soft  cloth and glass cleaner     Care of Safety Belts    Keep belts clean and dry     Do not bleach or dye safety belts  If you do  it    may severely weaken them  In a crash  they  might not be able to provide adequate  protection  Clean safety belts only with mild  soap and lukewarm water        Weatherstrips    Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  longer  seal better  and not stick or squeak  Apply  silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every   six months  During very cold  damp weather more  frequent application may be required  See  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13     5 81    Cleaning the Outside of Your  Vehicle    The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty  depth  of color  gloss retention and durability     Washing Your Vehicle    The best way to preserve your vehicle   s finish is  to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or  cold water     Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun   Use a car washing soap  Do not use strong soaps   or chemical detergents  Be sure to rinse the vehicle well   removing all soap residue completely  You can get  GM approved cleaning products from your dealer  See  Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 85    Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based   or that contain acid or ab
220. opping distance will be longer and  vehicle control more limited     While driving on a surface with reduced traction  try  your best to avoid sudden steering  acceleration   or braking  including engine braking by shifting to a  lower gear   Any sudden changes could cause the tires  to slide  You may not realize the surface is slippery   until your vehicle is skidding  Learn to recognize warning  clues     such as enough water  ice or packed snow   on the road to make a    mirrored surface        and slow  down when you have any doubt     Remember  Any anti lock brake system  ABS  helps  avoid only the braking skid     Driving at Night       Night driving is more dangerous than day driving   One reason is that some drivers are likely to be  impaired     by alcohol or drugs  with night vision  problems  or by fatigue     Here are some tips on night driving     Drive defensively     Do not drink and drive       Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the  glare from headlamps behind you     e Since you can not see as well  you may need to  slow down and keep more space between you  and other vehicles     e Slow down  especially on higher speed roads  Your  headlamps can light up only so much road ahead       In remote areas  watch for animals       If you are tired  pull off the road in a safe place  and rest     No one can see as well at night as in the daytime    But as we get older these differences increase    A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much  l
221. or TREBLE  appears on the display  Turn the knob to increase or   to decrease  If a station is weak or noisy  you may want  to decrease the treble     To adjust bass or treble to the middle position  select  BASS or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob   The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display  level to zero     To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle  position  push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone  or speaker control is displayed  CENTERED will  appear on the display and you will hear a beep     EQ  Equalization   Press this button to select  customized equalization settings designed for rock  pop   jazz  classical  and vocal     To turn equalization off  press this button until EQ OFF  appears on the display     To give an equalization setting a boost  push the  AUDIO knob once while in any equalization setting   BOOST will appear on the display  Turn the AUDIO  knob to select one of the available boost levels  Different  levels of boost can be set for each of the equalization  settings     Adjusting the Speakers  Balance Fade     AUDIO  To adjust the balance between the right  and the left speakers  push the AUDIO knob until  BALANCE appears on the display  Turn the knob to  move the sound toward the left or the right speakers     To adjust the fade between the front and the rear  speakers  push and hold the AUDIO knob until FADER  appears on the display  Turn the knob to move the  sound toward the front or the rear speakers     Playing a
222. or down arrows to adjust the setting   When correct  briefly press the SET button  Each  PRESET can be changed in this way     The presets are automatically arranged in  ascending order     One or more presets can be assigned to OFF  by  reducing the preset down to 0  OFF   When driving you  then only have three or less presets to choose from    To turn back on  select the OFF preset  when the  vehicle is standing still  and use the up arrow to increase  the number     If the up or down arrows are briefly pressed while  driving  the overspeed setting is changed to the speed  at which you are travelling     If the SET button is pressed for two seconds  either  while driving or standing still  overspeed is turned  completely off or on     Stop Watch    The stop watch function  when enabled  records  elapsed time  It can be used  for example  to measure  the time taken to travel between two points on a trip   To start stop the stop watch  press SET to reset it  then  press and hold MODE for more than three seconds   The trip computer must be on Trip Time for this function  to work     DIGITAL SPEEDO    If digital speedo mode is activated  the mph  km h  are  shown in a large digital mode     Rest Reminder    This feature alerts you when you may have been  travelling for too long without a break  After the ignition  is turned on  a timer will start  and after two hours of  continuous driving  the trip computer automatically  shows the rest reminder display  The default on this  f
223. ore  information     Used Replacement Wheels    Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  dangerous  You can   t know how it   s been used  or how far it   s been driven  It could fail  suddenly and cause a crash  If you have to  replace a wheel  use a new GM original  equipment wheel     Tire Chains    Don   t use tire chains  There   s not enough  clearance  Tire chains used on a vehicle  without the proper amount of clearance can  cause damage to the brakes  suspension or  other vehicle parts  The area damaged by the  tire chains could cause you to lose control of  your vehicle and you or others may be injured  in a crash  Use another type of traction device  only if its manufacturer recommends it for use  on your vehicle and tire size combination and  road conditions  Follow that manufacturer   s  instructions  To help avoid damage to your  vehicle  drive slowly  readjust or remove the  device if it   s contacting your vehicle  and don   t  spin your wheels  If you do find traction  devices that will fit  install them on the   rear tires        5 69    If a Tire Goes Flat    It s unusual for a tire to    blowout    while you re driving   especially if you maintain your tires properly  If air goes  out of a tire  it   s much more likely to leak out slowly   But if you should ever have a    blowout     here are a few  tips about what to expect and what to do     If a front tire fails  the flat tire will create a drag that  pulls the vehicle toward that side  Take your foot o
224. orrect   press the MODE button to continue     2 34    TRIP COMPUTER A  amp  B    This option is used to select either one or two Trip  Time Trip Distance Fuel Used set of displays  Use  the up or down arrows to select Trip A or Trip A  amp  B   Press the MODE button to continue  The default  selection is Trip A     STOP WATCH    This option is used to enable or disable the Stop Watch  display  Use the up or down arrows to select Yes or  No  If Yes is selected  the Stop Watch display is  activated  Press the MODE button to continue  The  default selection is No     REST REMINDER    This option is to alert the driver that they may have  been travelling for too long without a break  Use the   up or down arrows to select No or Yes  the default is Off   Press the MODE button to continue     DIGITAL SPEEDO    This option allows you to turn on a digital speedometer  that will display on the center display  Use the up or  down arrows to select Yes or No  The default selection  is Yes  Press MODE to continue     RADIO DISPLAY    This option is used to enable or disable the audio  system display on the instrument panel  Detailed  information on the operation of the radio and CD is  provided in the audio section  Use the up or down  arrows to select On or Off  If On is selected  the Radio  display is activated  the default is On  Press the  MODE button to continue  See Radio with Six Disc CD  on page 3 43  The default selection is On     CONFIRMATION BEEPS    This option is used to ena
225. osition  After  you move the adjuster   to where you want it  try to  move it without squeezing  it  to make sure it has  locked into position     Q  What s wrong with this                                A  The shoulder belt is too loose  It will not give nearly  as much protection this way     You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt    is too loose  In a crash  you would move  forward too much  which could increase injury   The shoulder belt should fit against your body        Q  What   s wrong with this                       A  The belt is buckled in the wrong place        You can be seriously injured if your belt is  buckled in the wrong place like this  In a crash     the belt would go up over your abdomen  The  belt forces would be there  not at the pelvic  bones  This could cause serious internal  injuries  Always buckle your belt into the  buckle nearest you        Q  What   s wrong with this           You can be seriously injured if you wear the  shoulder belt under your arm  In a crash  your  body would move too far forward  which would  increase the chance of head and neck injury   Also  the belt would apply too much force to  the ribs  which aren   t as strong as shoulder  bones  You could also severely injure internal  organs like your liver or spleen                  The shoulder belt is worn under the arm  It should  be worn over the shoulder at all times     Q  What   s wrong with this        D    AD  iy      GIS Wen      YA      MES                    
226. ou badly  They  are under pressure  and if you turn the radiator    pressure cap     even a little     they can come  out at high speed  Never turn the cap when the  cooling system  including the radiator pressure  cap  is hot  Wait for the cooling system and  radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have  to turn the pressure cap           5 33    Adding only plain water to your cooling  system can be dangerous  Plain water  or  some other liquid such as alcohol  can boil  before the proper coolant mixture will  Your    You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot    engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol  and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Do not spill coolant on a hot engine        vehicle   s coolant warning system is set for the  proper coolant mixture  With plain water or the  wrong mixture  your engine could get too hot   but you would not get the overheat warning  You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure    1  Park the vehicle on a level surface     cap when the cooling system  including the coolant  surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator   hose  is no longer hot  Turn the pressure cap slowly  counterclockwise  left  about two or two and  one half turns  If you hear a hiss  wait for that to      This will allow any pressure still left to be  Notice  In cold weather  water can freeze and crack stop a a yP       vented out the discharge hose   the engine  radiator  heater core and other parts  j  Use the recommended coolant and the
227. ou drive     This feature will never completely compensate for  driving noise  There are other factors such as road  surface  wind noise  windows open  and engine speed  that may alter the interior noise for any given road  speed     You can select compensation rates between 0  off  and  5  maximum compensation  in the options menu    See    Options Menu Adjustment    later in this section to  adjust SDV     Dynamic Distortion Limiting  DDL     Your radio has a feature that limits the amount of  amplifier distortion that you can hear  When this feature  is turned on  it continuously monitors the quality of   the signal to the speakers  When the signal distortion  exceeds the preset limits the radio will automatically limit  or reduce the volume until the distortion is minimized   Under some circumstances  distortion may be heard for  a very short period of time until the system has taken  the necessary steps to limit it     The main source of distortion in music is the low  frequency bass caused by drums or large instruments   Music that features very strong bass may trigger the  distortion limiting system and the system will then  reduce the volume to minimize the distortion     3 50    Increasing the bass control or the EQ boost may also  result in a reduced volume level due to the emphasized  bass  See    Setting the Tone  Bass Treble     previously   in this section  The DDL can be turned off so that   the radio will deliver a higher volume level  but distortion  will als
228. our Engine    Automatic Transmission    Move your shift lever to PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N    Your engine won t start in any other position     that   s a  safety feature  To restart when you re already moving   use NEUTRAL  N  only     Notice  Do not try to shift to PARK  P  if your  vehicle is moving  If you do  you could damage the  transmission  Shift to PARK  P  only when your  vehicle is stopped     Manual Transmission    The shift lever should be in neutral and the parking  brake engaged  Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and  start the engine  Your vehicle won t start if the clutch  pedal is not all the way down     that   s a safety feature     Starting Your Engine    1  With your foot off the accelerator pedal and the  parking brake firmly applied  turn your ignition  key to START  When the engine starts  let go of the  key  The idle speed will go down as your engine  gets warm     Notice  Holding your key in START for longer than  15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to   be drained much sooner  And the excessive heat  can damage your starter motor  Wait about   15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining  your battery or damaging your starter     2  If it doesn   t start  wait about 15 seconds and try  again to start the engine by turning the ignition  key to START  Wait about 15 seconds between  each try     When your engine has run about 10 seconds to  warm up  your vehicle is ready to be driven  Don t  run your engine at high speeds when it is cold
229. ours only     Trip Distance    This function shows the miles travelled from the start of  a particular trip  Reset the reading to zero by pressing  and holding the SET button down for eight seconds     FUEL USED    This function shows the total gallons liters of fuel used  since the trip computer was reset     TIME TO ARRIVAL    This function shows trip time to arrival in hours and  minutes  based on distance to arrival  If this exceeds   99 hours and 59 minutes  the time to arrival is displayed  in hours only     Dist to Arrival    At the start of a trip estimate your distance to arrival   Tap the up or down arrows until the display shows your  estimated trip distance  When you drive off  the computer  constantly updates your time to arrival  based on  changing driving speeds  You can use the up or down  arrows to adjust the miles any time this display is shown     FUEL REMAINING    This function shows the gallons of fuel left in the fuel  tank  rounded to the nearest one gallon liter  When the  fuel level is down to about two gallons  LO is displayed  instead of gallons     If the Low Fuel message in the trip computer comes on  when driving  it indicates that the fuel level is low    The Low Fuel message is displayed until the MODE  button on the trip computer switch is pressed  The trip  computer then displays its calculation of miles to   empty for 10 seconds before reverting to the original trip  computer display with a small low fuel symbol on the  left  The symbol will
230. ow about the  air bag system     1 46    You can be severely injured or killed in a crash  if you are not wearing your safety belt     even  if you have air bags  Wearing your safety belt  during a crash helps reduce your chance of  hitting things inside the vehicle or being  ejected from it  Air bags are designed to work  with safety belts  but do not replace them  Air  bags are designed to deploy only in moderate  to severe frontal and near frontal crashes   They are not designed to inflate in rollover   rear or low speed frontal crashes  or in many  side crashes  And  for some unrestrained  occupants  air bags may provide less  protection in frontal crashes than more  forceful air bags have provided in the past   Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety  belt properly     whether or not there is an air  bag for that person        Air bags inflate with great force  faster than the  blink of an eye  If you   re too close to an  inflating air bag  as you would be if you were  leaning forward  it could seriously injure you   Safety belts help keep you in position before  and during a crash  Always wear your safety  belt  even with air bags  The driver should sit  as far back as possible while still maintaining  control of the vehicle     Anyone who is up against  or very close to    any air bag when it inflates can be seriously  injured or killed  Air bags plus lap shoulder   belts offer the best protection for adults  but  not for young children and infants     CAUTION  
231. pants can contact the steering wheel or  the instrument panel  Air bags supplement the  protection provided by safety belts  Air bags distribute  the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant   s  upper body  stopping the occupant more gradually    But air bags would not help you in many types of  collisions  including rollovers  rear impacts and many  side impacts  primarily because an occupant   s motion is  not toward those air bags  Air bags should never be  regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety  belts  and then only in moderate to severe frontal or  near frontal collisions     1 50    What Will You See After an Air Bag  Inflates     After the air bag inflates  it quickly deflates  so quickly  that some people may not even realize the air bag  inflated  Some components of the air bag module will be  hot for a short time  These components include the  steering wheel hub for the driver   s frontal air bag and the  instrument panel for the right front passenger s frontal  air bag  The parts of the bag that come into contact with  you may be warm  but not too hot to touch  There will  be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in   the deflated air bags  Air bag inflation does not prevent  the driver from seeing or being able to steer the   vehicle  nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle     When an air bag inflates  there is dust in the  air  This dust could cause breathing problems  for people with a history of asthma or other  breathing 
232. peration             2 5 Parking Brake  iseen agaa e e 2 23   Doors and LOCKS           00  cccccccccccceeeseeeseeeesseees 2 6 Shifting Into Park  P              sssssssssssesererererernnes 2 24  Door LOCKS sisien iaae asian a a aeeie Eie 2 6 Shifting Out of Park  P  s es 2 26  Leaving Your Vehicle               ccccceceeeeeeeeeene eens 2 7 Parking Your Vehicle Key Removal                    2 26  TUNK eeina a N E REISE Een 2 8 Parking Over Things That Burn                          2 27   Wind 2 10 Engine EXMAUSE 225 onen ones telnet 2 27  eee e ER a Running Your Engine While You Are Parked     2 28  SUN VISOIS ereas et rE EEE aE aE 2 12 Mo a eau P   Theft Deterrent Systems 2    eo oe ee 399  FEE System su ssssssssesenerrerrrrennrens SEE Outside Convex Mirror       u ssseeevereeeererererene 2 30  Immobilizer Operation ec 2 13 Storage Areas              cece eee eeeeee eee eee ennen 2 30  Content Theft Deterrent          000  ee 2 14 ine ie Bee ces HEDEN ER SES SDU yy orate tenet T   Starting and Operating Your Vehicle                  2 15 a ar a ae a A  iol RR SU ER eee a ape a Center Console Storage Area cecce 2 31  Starting Your Engine 2 17 Wehicle Personalization sussie deles 2 32    2 1    Keys    Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  key is dangerous for many reasons  They    could operate the power windows or other  controls or even make the vehicle move  The  children or others could be badly injured or  even killed  Do not leave the keys in a vehicle  with
233. ployment  The module also records speed   engine rpm  brake and throttle data       Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag  systems  Improper service can mean that an air  bag system will not work properly  See your dealer  for service     Notice  If you damage the covering for the driver   s  or the right front passenger   s air bag  the bag   may not work properly  You may have to replace the  air bag module in the steering wheel or both the   air bag module and the instrument panel for   the right front passenger   s air bag  Do not open or  break the air bag coverings     1 51    Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped  Vehicle    Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced   There are parts of the air bag system in several places  around your vehicle  You don   t want the system to  inflate while someone is working on your vehicle  Your  dealer and the service manual have information   about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system  To  purchase a service manual  see Service Publications  Ordering Information on page 7 11     For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is  turned off and the battery is disconnected  an  air bag can still inflate during improper  service  You can be injured if you are close to    an air bag when it inflates  Avoid yellow wires   wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow  connectors  They are probably part of the air  bag system  Be sure to follow proper service  procedures  and make sure the person  performing work for yo
234. quick decision  If you are holding the steering wheel at  the recommended 9 and 3 o   clock positions  you   can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without  removing either hand  But you have to act fast  steer  quickly  and just as quickly straighten the wheel   once you have avoided the object     The fact that such emergency situations are always  possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  at all times and wear safety belts properly     Off Road Recovery    You may find that your right wheels have dropped  off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while  you re driving        If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  pavement  recovery should be fairly easy  Ease off the  accelerator and then  if there is nothing in the way   steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of   the pavement  You can turn the steering wheel up to  one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts   the pavement edge  Then turn your steering wheel to go  straight down the roadway     Passing    The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  two lane highway waits for just the right moment   accelerates  moves around the vehicle ahead  then    goes back into the right lane again  A simple maneuver   Not necessarily  Passing another vehicle on a two lane    highway is a potentially dangerous move  since the  passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming    traffic for several seconds  A miscalculation  an error in    judgment  or a brief surrender to
235. r sure that you are near  help and you can hike through the snow  Here are  some things to do to summon help and keep yourself  and your passengers safe       Turn on your hazard flashers       Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  you have been stopped by the snow     e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you   If you have no blankets or extra clothing  make  body insulators from newspapers  burlap bags  rags   floor mats     anything you can wrap around  yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm  Snow can trap exhaust gases under your     vehicle  This can cause deadly CO  carbon  monoxide  gas to get inside  CO could  overcome you and kill you  You can not see it  or smell it  so you might not know it is in your  vehicle  Clear away snow from around the  base of your vehicle  especially any that is  blocking your exhaust pipe  And check around  again from time to time to be sure snow does  not collect there     Open a window just a little on the side of the  vehicle that is away from the wind  This will  help keep CO out        You can run the engine to keep warm  but be careful     4 27    Run your engine only as long as you must  This saves  fuel  When you run the engine  make it go a little   faster than just idle  That is  push the accelerator  slightly  This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and  it keeps the battery charged  You will need a  well charged battery to restart the vehicle  and possibly  for signaling later on wit
236. racket could    cause the anchor to come loose or even break  during a crash  A child or others could be  injured if this happens  To help prevent injury  to people and damage to your vehicle  attach  only one child restraint per bracket        Once you have the top strap anchored  you ll be ready  to secure the child restraint itself  Tighten the top  strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer   s  instructions say     Top Strap Anchor Location    Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for  the rear seating positions  You ll find them behind   the rear seat head restraints  Pull up the head restraint  to access the anchors        The straps from the child restraint must be threaded  between the poles of the head restraint on the seat   The strap must not go around the head restraint     Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right  front passenger   s position because there is no place  to anchor the top strap     1 37    Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers  for Children  LATCH System     ali    e    Your vehicle has the LATCH system  You will find  anchors  A  for the two rear seat positions        This system  designed to make installation of child  restraints easier  does not use the vehicle s safety belts   Instead  it uses vehicle anchors  A  B  and child  restraint attachments to secure the restraints  Some  restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a  top tether strap  C         1 38    If a LATCH type child restraint is not
237. raint  just unbuckle the vehicle   s  safety belt and let it go back all the way  The safety   belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an  adult or larger child passenger        1 42    Securing a Child Restraint in the  Right Front Seat Position       Y A child in a rear facing child restraint can be  DE seriously injured or killed if the right front    passenger s air bag inflates  This is because  the back of the rear facing child restraint  would be very close to the inflating air bag   Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a  rear seat        lf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH  system  see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for i i  Children  LATCH System  on page 1 38  A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing  child restraint  If you need to secure a forward facing  child restraint in the right front seat  you will be using the  lap shoulder belt  See the earlier part about the Top  Strap on page 1 36  if the child restraint has one    Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the  child restraint  Secure the child in the child restraint  when and as the instructions say     Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag   Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat   Here is why     1  Because your vehicle has a right front passenger  air bag  always move the seat as far back as it will  go before securing a forward facing child restraint   See    Seats    in the Index     2  Put the restraint on the
238. ranty coverage information     Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating  dealers and all program options  such as shuttle  service  may not be available at every dealer  Please  contact your dealer for specific information about  availability  All Courtesy Transportation arrangements  will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel     Canadian Vehicles  For warranty repairs during   the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General  Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty   alternative transportation may be available under the  Courtesy Transportation Program  Please consult  your dealer for details     General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify   change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at   any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  pursuant to terms and conditions described herein   at its sole discretion     Vehicle Data Collection and Event  Data Recorders    Your vehicle  like other modern motor vehicles  has a  number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor  and control several aspects of the vehicle   s  performance  Your vehicle uses on board vehicle  computers to monitor emission control components to  optimize fuel economy  to monitor conditions for air bag  deployment and  if so equipped  to provide anti lock  braking and to help the driver control the vehicle   in difficult driving situations  Some information may be  stored during regular operations to facilitate repair   of detected malf
239. rasives  All cleaning agents  should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the  surface  or they could stain  Dry the finish with a soft   clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface  scratches and water spotting     High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  your vehicle     5 82    Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses    Use only lukewarm or cold water  a soft cloth and a car  washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses   Follow instructions under    Washing Your Vehicle        Finish Care    Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by  hand may be necessary to remove residue from the  paint finish  You can get GM approved cleaning products  from your dealer  See Vehicle Care Appearance  Materials on page 5 85     Your vehicle has a    basecoat clearcoat    paint finish  The  clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  basecoat  Always use waxes and polishes that are  non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint  finish     Notice  Machine compounding or aggressive  polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may  damage it  Use only non abrasive waxes and  polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat  paint finish on your vehicle     Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  salts  ice melting agents  road oil and tar  tree sap  bird  droppings  chemicals from industrial chimneys  etc    can damage your vehicle   s finish if they remain   on painted surfaces  Wash the vehicle as soon as  possible  If nec
240. re above the tops of the seats    Do not leave an unsecured child restraint  in your vehicle    When you carry something inside the  vehicle  secure it whenever you can    Do not leave a seat folded down unless  you need to        4 35    4 NOTES    4 36    Section 5 Service and Appearance Care       SEVICE eaire a aaia n E 5 3 Windshield Washer Fluid a s 5 37  Doing Your Own Service Work          W    u  sssesererereree 5 4 Brakes asara a E AES 5 38  Adding Equipment to the Outside of Batleny sa a a E NN 5 41   Your Vehicle ssriernossiirnsrnnpi itnn 5 5 JUMP  Staring  lt dsecenewesetincicadcnsndaitddnadertetneandted 5 42   F  el sorrera A E 5 5 Bulb Replacement a nn 5 47  Gasoline Octane     W W   ssseseeeerere renerne renen rene 5 5 Halogen BUDS es  bon nen reana e R bonden 5 47  Gasoline Specifications              ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeee tees 5 5 Headlamps  Rede nale eee 5 47  California  RUC eses emaan ae EES 5 6 Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps                5 49  Additives iaieiiea nanoia ae niara 5 6 Rear Turn Signal  Stoplamps and  Fuels in Foreign Countries              ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 Back Up  Lamps      s viecstenearsareacvent le none 5 49  Filling Your Tank scctiescaettadsnetaanetiaoincdeeseonas cease 5 7 Replacement Bulbs                c eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 50  Filling a Portable Fuel Container                   0008 5 9 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement                5 50   Checking Things Under the Hood                      5 10 Tires ee eee ne 
241. re is enough space between  the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna   without interfering with radio reception     Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass   The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere  with or distort the incoming radio reception  Care   must be taken when cleaning the rear window because  it breaks in the resistive material heating element   and will adversely affect radio and defogger  performance  See your dealer for details     3 55    4 NOTES    3 56       Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle   Your Driving  the Road  and Your Vehicle            4 2 Freeway Driving              cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 20  Defensive Driving srera n 4 2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 1    4 21  Drunken DIVING  32  orale relse EE 4 2 Highway Hypnosis               ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 22  Control of a Vehicle              ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 4 5 Hill and Mountain Roads                ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 22  Braking  tccccetseeh erne hand bene scannere 4 5 Winter DIVINA arb aed 4 24  Traction Control System  TCS  o ae 4 8 If You Are Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice  Steerihg cidsccdsctarsnccwheascameptcanmmenecamcadieneneaden teed 4 9 OF SNOW oaa aaa E E Ee E O iS 4 28  Off Road Recovery oo    ieee ANT TOWING  fesson ne Ee Ea 4 29  PASSING sera kirn dete aae a a 4 12 Towing Your Vehicle css 4 29  Loss of Control ER I E E EE EE 4 13 Recreational Vehicle Towing                          4 30  Driving at Night ss  eters 4 15 Loadi
242. reading if you  check your transmission fluid     Check the fluid level only when your engine is off  the  vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission  is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the  transmission case     Then  follow these steps   1  Remove the reverse light switch     2  Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of  the switch hole     3  If the fluid level is good  install the switch and be  sure it is fully seated  If the fluid level is low  add  more fluid as described in the next steps     How to Add Fluid    Here   s how to add fluid  Refer to the Maintenance  Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use  See  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13     1  Remove the reverse light switch     2  Add fluid at the switch hole  Add only enough  fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of  the switch hole    3  Install the reverse light switch  Be sure the switch is  fully seated     5 23    Hydraulic Clutch    The clutch fluid level should be checked weekly  A fluid  loss in this system could indicate a problem  If the  clutch fluid requires constant filling up it could indicate a  leak  Have the system inspected and repaired by   your dealer  Adding fluid won t correct a leak     When to Check and What to Use    Refer to the Maintenance  Schedule to determine the  proper fluid  See Owner  Checks and Services   on page 6 9 and  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants on page 6 13        5 24    How to Check and Add Flui
243. rent colors  or in different words     You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle  They use  the same words  CAUTION or NOTICE     Vehicle Symbols    Your vehicle has components and labels that use  symbols instead of text  Symbols  used on your vehicle   are shown along with the text describing the operation  or information relating to a specific component  control   message  gage or indicator     If you need help figuring out a specific name of a  component  gage or indicator  reference the following  topics       Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1     Features and Controls in Section 2     Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3     Climate Controls in Section 3     Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators in Section 3    Audio System s  in Section 3     Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5    These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle     CAUTION  POSSIBLE  INJURY    PROTECT  EYES BY  SHIELDING    CAUSTIC  BATTERY  ACID COULD  CAUSE  BURNS    AVOID  SPARKS OR  FLAMES    SPARK OR  FLAME  COULD  EXPLODE  BATTERY       LATCH BOTH LAP AND  SHOULDER BELTS TO  PROTECT OCCUPANT  DO NOT TWIST SAFETY  BELT WHEN ATTACHING    FASTEN  SEAT  BELTS    B      es  AIR BAG X    MOVE SEAT DO NOT INSTALL    FULLY    A REAR FACING    J  Ve  REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT  SECURE a  IN THIS SEATING    CHILD SEAT    PULL BELT  OUT  COMPLETELY e  THEN SECURE y   CHILD SEAT    POWER   4  WINDOW           POSITION    e DO NOT INSTALL A  FORWARD FACING  CHILD RESTRAINT  IN 
244. ring Information on  page 7 11    Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting  to do your own service work  see Servicing Your Air  Bag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 52     You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list  the mileage and the date of any service work you  perform  See Maintenance Record on page 6 17     You can be injured and your vehicle could be  damaged if you try to do service work on a  vehicle without knowing enough about it      Be sure you have sufficient knowledge     experience  the proper replacement parts  and tools before you attempt any vehicle  maintenance task    Be sure to use the proper nuts  bolts and  other fasteners     English    and    metric     fasteners can be easily confused  If you  use the wrong fasteners  parts can later  break or fall off  You could be hurt        Adding Equipment to the Outside of  Your Vehicle    Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can  affect the airflow around it  This may cause wind   noise and affect windshield washer performance  Check  with your dealer before adding equipment to the  outside of your vehicle     Fuel    Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the  proper maintenance of your vehicle     Gasoline Octane    Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of  91 or higher for best performance  You may also use  middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at   87 octane or higher  but your vehicle   s acceleration may  be slightly reduced  If 
245. riving through a large puddle of water  or a car wash  apply your brake pedal lightly  until your brakes work normally              Hydroplaning    Hydroplaning is dangerous  So much water can build up  under your tires that they can actually ride on the   water  This can happen if the road is wet enough and  you are going fast enough  When your vehicle is  hydroplaning  it has little or no contact with the road     Hydroplaning does not happen often  But it can if your  tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in   one or more is low  It can happen if a lot of water is  standing on the road  If you can see reflections   from trees  telephone poles or other vehicles  and  raindrops    dimple    the water   s surface  there could be  hydroplaning     Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds  There  just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning   The best advice is to slow down when it is raining     Driving Through Deep Standing Water    Notice  If you drive too quickly through deep  puddles or standing water  water can come in  through your engine   s air intake and badly damage  your engine  Never drive through water that is  slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle    If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water   drive through them very slowly     4 18    Driving Through Flowing Water    Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces   If you try to drive through flowing water  as you  might at a low water crossing  your vehicle can    be 
246. rning Devices    If you carry reflective triangles  you can set one up at  the side of the road about 300 feet  100 m  behind your  vehicle     Horn    You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbol  anywhere on your steering wheel     Tilt Wheel    A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel  before you drive  You can raise the steering wheel to  the highest level to give your legs more room when you  enter and exit the vehicle     The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is  located under the steering column        To tilt the wheel  pull the lever down  Then move the  wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to  lock the wheel in place     Telescopic Steering Column    The steering column also has a telescopic function  This  function allows the wheel to move toward the front of  the vehicle and toward the rear of the vehicle     Turn Signal Multifunction Lever    ON OFF  CANCEL       The lever on the left side of the steering column  includes the following       Turn and Lane Change Signals   e Headlamp High Low Beam Changer    Flash to Pass     Cruise Control    For information on the exterior lamps  see Exterior  Lamps on page 3 12     Turn and Lane Change Signals    To signal a turn  move the lever all the way up to signal  right turn and all the way down to signal a left turn   When the turn is finished  the lever will return  automatically     An arrow on the instrument  panel cluster will flash in  the direction of the   turn or
247. rs for service nationwide     e Receive special promotions and privileges only  available to members   United States only     Refer to the web for updated information     To register your vehicle  visit www MyGMLink com    United States  or My GM Canada within  www gmcanada com  Canada      Customer Assistance for Text  Telephone  TTY  Users    To assist customers who are deaf  hard of hearing  or  speech impaired and who use Text Telephones  TTYs    Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer  Assistance Center  Any TTY user can communicate  with Pontiac by dialing  1 800 833 PONT  7668      TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830      Customer Assistance Offices    Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll free  number for assistance  If a U S  customer wishes to  write to Pontiac  the letter should be addressed to  Pontiac   s Customer Assistance Center     United States     Customer Assistance    Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center  P O  Box 33172  Detroit  MI 48232 5172    1 800 762 2737 or  1 800 833 7668  For Text Telephone devices  TTYs    Roadside Assistance  1 800 ROADSIDE  762 3743   Fax Number  313 381 0022  From Puerto Rico   1 800 496 9992  English   1 800 496 9993  Spanish   Fax Number  313 381 0022    7 4    From U S  Virgin Islands   1 800 496 9994  Fax Number  313 381 0022    Canada     Customer Assistance    General Motors of Canada Limited   Customer Communication Centre  163 005   1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario L1H 8P7   1 800
248. s  only to vehicles sold in the United States   The grades  are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  tires  The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not  apply to deep tread  winter type snow tires  soace saver  or temporary use spare tires  tires with nominal rim  diameters of 10 to 12 inches  25 to 30 cm   or to some  limited production tires     While the tires available on General Motors passenger  cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these  grades  they must also conform to federal safety  requirements     5 66    Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course    For example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and   a half  11   2  times as well on the government course as  a tire graded 100  The relative performance of tires  depends upon the actual conditions of their use   however  and may depart significantly from the norm  due to variations in driving habits  service practices and  differences in road characteristics and climate     Traction     AA  A  B  C    The traction grades  from highest to lowest  are AA  A   B  and C  Those grades represent the tire   s ability   to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled  conditions on specified government test surfaces of  asphalt and concrete  A tire marked C may have poor  traction performance  Warning  The traction grade  assigned to this tire is based on straight a
249. s  shown  or      share summary data which is not tied to a specific  vehicle with non GM organizations for research  purposes     Others  such as law enforcement  may have access to  the special equipment that can read the information  if they have access to the vehicle or SDM     If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar    please check  the OnStar   subscription service agreement or  manual for information on its operations and data  collection     Reporting Safety Defects    Reporting Safety Defects to the  United States Government    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could  cause a crash or could cause injury or death  you  should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic  Safety Administration  NHTSA   in addition to notifying  General Motors     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved in  individual problems between you  your dealer or  General Motors     To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393  or 366 0123 in  the Washington  D C  area  or write to     NHTSA  U S  Department of Transportation  Washington  D C  20590    You can also obtain other information about motor  vehicle safety from the hotline     Reporting Safety Defects to General  Motors    In addition to notifying NHTSA  or Transport Canada  in  a situation l
250. s if it detects a fault in the lock system  when the LOCK button is pressed  You should check to  see that the doors have locked      e  Trunk   Press the button with the opened trunk  symbol to release the trunk lid     The trunk button on the key will not work if you are  travelling over 12 mph  20 km h      Battery    Under normal use  the battery in your key should last  about five years     You can tell the battery is weak if the key won t work at  the normal range in any location  If you have to get  close to your vehicle before the key works  it is probably  time for a new battery  See your dealer     The key buttons will not work if the battery inside the  key is flat  Try turning the key in the ignition to ON  then  off again and remove it  Try pressing LOCK on the   key again  If it still does not work a replacement key may  be needed from your vehicle dealer     Doors and Locks    Door Locks    Unlocked doors can be dangerous   e Passengers     especially children     can    easily open the doors and fall out of a  moving vehicle  When a door is locked  the  handle will not open it  You increase the  chance of being thrown out of the vehicle  in a crash if the doors are not locked  So   wear safety belts properly and lock the  doors whenever you drive    Young children who get into unlocked  vehicles may be unable to get out  A child  can be overcome by extreme heat and can  suffer permanent injuries or even death  from heat stroke  Always lock your vehicle  whenev
251. s not cover this type of  damage  Keep tires set to the correct inflation  pressure and  when possible avoid contact with  curbs  potholes and other road hazards     5 51    Winter Tires    If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads  often  you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle   High performance tires  like the original equipment   tires installed on your vehicle  are designed for very  responsive driving on wet or dry pavement and may not  offer the traction you would like or the same level of    performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered OR15  roads  If you choose to use winter tires  NV NU 975    5  DOT MAL gap   err      Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all  four wheel positions       Use only radial ply tires of the same size as your  original equipment tires     See your Pontiac dealer for details regarding winter tire  availability and proper tire selection  Also  see Buying  New Tires on page 5 65     Tire Sidewall Labeling    Useful information about a tire is molded into its  sidewall  The examples below show a typical passenger  car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall        Passenger Car Tire Example    5 52     A  Tire Size  The tire size is a combination of letters  and numbers used to define a particular tire   s width   height  aspect ratio  construction type and service  description  See the    Tire Size    illustration later in this  section for more detail      B  Department of Transportation  DOT   The  Departm
252. s to  select Yes or No  If Yes is selected  the Two Stage  Unlock function is activated  the default is Yes  Press  the MODE button to continue  See Remote Keyless  Entry System Operation on page 2 5 for more  information     AUTO LOCK IN DRIVE  Automatic  Transmission Only     This option is used to enable or disable the automatic  door locking when in Drive function  Use the up or down  arrows to select Yes or No  If Yes is selected  the   Auto Lock In Drive function is activated  the default is  No  Press the MODE button to continue  See Door  Locks on page 2 6     DOOR LOCK INDICATION    This option is used to select the type of indication  provided to the driver upon locking and unlocking the  vehicle   s doors  Use the up or down arrows to select  Indicators or Indicators  amp  Horn  the default is Indicators   Press the MODE button to continue     Exiting Programming Mode  To exit  do one of the following     Press the MODE bution to scroll through to the exit  screen     Drive the vehicle at more than 6 mph  10 km h    e Switch the ignition off if vehicle is stopped     EXIT OPTIONS MENU    This option is used to either exit personalization mode  options menu or to return to the start of the options  menu  Use the up or down arrows to select Yes or No   If Yes is selected  the trip computer exits calibration  mode and returns to the previous trip computer display   If No is selected  the menu jumps back to the start of  the options menu  RESTORE TO FACTORY SETTINGS  d
253. s your exit  do  not  under any circumstances  stop and back up  Drive  on to the next exit     The exit ramp can be curved  sometimes quite sharply   The exit speed is usually posted  Reduce your speed  according to your speedometer  not to your sense   of motion  After driving for any distance at higher  speeds  you may tend to think you are going slower  than you actually are     Before Leaving on a Long Trip    Make sure you are ready  Try to be well rested  If you  must start when you are not fresh     such as after   a day   s work     do not plan to make too many miles that  first part of the journey  Wear comfortable clothing   and shoes you can easily drive in     Is your vehicle ready for a long trip  If you keep it  serviced and maintained  it is ready to go  If it needs  service  have it done before starting out  Of course  you  will find experienced and able service experts in GM  dealerships all across North America  They will be ready  and willing to help if you need it     Here are some things you can check before a trip     e Windshield Washer Fluid   s the reservoir full   Are all windows clean inside and outside     e Wiper Blades  Are they in good shape     e Fuel  Engine Oil  Other Fluids  Have you checked  all levels      Lamps  Are they all working  Are the lenses clean    e Tires  They are vitally important to a safe   trouble free trip  Is the tread good enough for    long distance driving  Are the tires all inflated to the  recommended pressure      
254. seconds   TIME ADJ or SET TIME will appear on the display  and the time will flash     2  Press either SEEK arrow to adjust the hour   3  Press either TUNE arrow to adjust the minutes   4  Press the TIME button again to save the new time     The radio will automatically exit the time setting mode  if no adjustments are made for eight seconds     Radio with Six Disc CD    Kr ice    TIME Fo    i i 1 i a    Playing the Radio    ON OFF  Press this button to turn the system on  and off     AUDIO  Volume   Turn this knob to increase or to  decrease the volume        Finding a Station    FM AM  Press this button to switch between FM1   FM2  and AM  The display will show your selection       4 TUNE CD    Press the right or the left arrow to  select radio stations     MA SEEK TRACK PPI   Press the right or the left  arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and  stay there     The radio will seek only to stations that are in the  selected band and only to those with a strong signal     LOC  Local   Press this button to switch the radio  to local mode  LOCAL will appear on the display and  you will only be able to listen and search for local  stations  This feature is useful when using seek for  searching for strong signals with good reception   and clear sound quality     3 43    Setting Preset Stations    The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to  your favorite stations  You can set up to 18 stations   six FM1  six FM2  and six AM  by performing the  following steps    
255. sed  The message  then reverts to the original trip computer display   with a small over temperature symbol on the left  The  symbol will remain until the problem is fixed  See Engine  Overheating on page 5 28     Low Coolant Warning  If the Low Coolant message in  the trip computer comes on while driving  it indicates  that the engine coolant level is dangerously low     You should check the level as soon as possible  see  Engine Coolant on page 5 25  The Low Coolant  message is displayed until the MODE button on the trip  computer switch is pressed  The message then   reverts to the original trip computer display with a small  low coolant symbol on the left  The symbol will remain  until the problem is fixed     Low Traction  If the Low Traction message appears in  the trip computer display while driving  it indicates   that the traction control system has sensed that your  vehicle requires help with road grip and that the system  is actively working to stop any wheel spin  The Low  Traction message is displayed for about one second   The message then reverts to the original trip computer  display with a small low traction symbol on the left   The symbol will remain as long as the low traction  situation exits  See Traction Control System  TCS    on page 4 8     Traction Off  If the Traction Ctrl Off message in the trip  computer display comes on while driving  without the  traction control being turned off by the driver  it indicates  the traction control system is not wor
256. sh the  button to release the   fuel door     To remove the fuel cap  turn it slowly to the left   counterclockwise   The fuel cap has a spring in it  if  you let go of the cap too soon  it will spring back to  the right     If you spill fuel and then something ignites it   you could be badly burned  Fuel can spray out  on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly     This spray can happen if your tank is nearly  full  and is more likely in hot weather  Open  the fuel cap slowly and wait for any    hiss     noise to stop  Then unscrew the cap all   the way        Be careful not to spill gasoline  Don   t top off or overfill  your tank  and wait a few seconds after you ve finished  pumping before you remove the nozzle  Clean   gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible   See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5 82     When you put the fuel cap back on  turn it to the right Filling a Portable Fuel Container   clockwise  until you hear a clicking sound  Make    sure you fully install the cap  The diagnostic system can  determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly  installed  This would allow fuel to evaporate into the  atmosphere  See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on   page 3 29  Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  your vehicle  Static electricity discharge from  the container can ignite the gasoline vapor   You can be badly burned and your vehicle  damaged if this occurs  To help avoid injury to    If a fire starts while you are refue
257. sition to turn recirculation    on  Turn the air conditioning on when using recirculation     Recirculation is not recommended for use over long  periods of time     Temperature Control  Turn the center dial clockwise  or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  temperature inside your vehicle     A C  Air Conditioning   Press this button on the left  dial to turn the air conditioning system on or off    When A C is pressed  an indicator light in the button will  come on to let you know that air conditioning is  activated     On hot days  open the windows to let hot inside air  escape  then close them  This helps to reduce the time  it takes for your vehicle to cool down  It also helps   the system to operate more efficiently     3 20    For quick cool down on hot days  do the following   1  Select the vent mode   2  Select the highest fan speed   3  Select A C   4  Select the coolest temperature     The air conditioning system removes moisture from the  air  so you may sometimes notice a small amount of  water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling   or after turning off the engine  This is normal     Defogging and Defrosting    Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity   moisture  condensing on the cool window glass  This  can be minimized if the climate control system is   used properly  There are two modes to choose from to  clear fog or frost from your windshield  Use the   defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and  warm the passe
258. ssage appears on the trip computer  display  it means you need to check your engine oil  level right away     For more information  see Oil Pressure Light on  page 3 32     You should check your engine oil level regularly  this is  an added reminder     Checking Engine Oil    It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you  get fuel  In order to get an accurate reading  the oil  must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground     The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop  See  Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for  the location of the engine oil dipstick     Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to  drain back into the oil pan  If you don   t  the oil  dipstick might not show the actual level     Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or  cloth  then push it back in all the way  Remove it again   keeping the tip down  and check the level     When to Add Engine Oil    If the oil is at or below the cross hatched area at the tip  of the dipstick  then you will need to add at least one  quart of oil  But you must use the right kind  This section  explains what kind of oil to use  For engine oil  crankcase capacity  see Capacities and Specifications  on page 5 92     Notice  Do not add too much oil  If your engine has  so much oil that the oil level gets above the  cross hatched area that shows the proper operating  range  your engine could be damaged     5 14       See Engine Compartment  Overview on page 5 12 for  the loc
259. sure the vehicles aren t touching  each other  If they are  it could cause a ground  connection you don   t want  You wouldn t be able to  start your vehicle  and the bad grounding could  damage the electrical systems     To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling  set  the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in  the jump start procedure  Put an automatic  transmission in PARK  P  or a manual transmission  in Neutral before setting the parking brake     Notice  If you leave your radio or other accessories  on during the jump starting procedure  they could  be damaged  The repairs would not be covered   by your warranty  Always turn off your radio and  other accessories when jump starting your vehicle     3  Turn off the ignition on both vehicles  Unplug  unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  lighter  Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t  needed  This will avoid sparks and help save  both batteries  And it could save your radio     4  Open the hoods and locate the batteries  Find the  positive     and negative       terminal locations on  each vehicle  See Engine Compartment Overview  on page 5 12 for more information on location     An electric fan can start up even when the    engine is not running and can injure you  Keep  hands  clothing and tools away from any  underhood electric fan        Using a match near a battery can cause battery  gas to explode  People have been hurt doing  this  and some have been blinded  Use a  flashlight 
260. t  See Compact Spare Tire on  page 5 77 and lf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 70      B  Tire Ply Material  The type of cord and number of  plies in the sidewall and under the tread      C  Tire Identification Number  TIN   The Tire  Identification Number  TIN   The TIN shows the  manufacturer and plant code  tire size  and date the tire  was manufactured  The TIN is molded onto both   sides of the tire  although only one side may have the  date of manufacture      D  Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit  Maximum  load that can be carried and the maximum pressure  needed to support that load  See Compact Spare Tire  on page 5 77 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 30      E  Tire Inflation  The temporary use tire or compact  spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi  420 kPa     For more information on tire pressure and inflation see  Inflation   Tire Pressure on page 5 58      F  Tire Size  A combination of letters and numbers  define a tire   s width  height  aspect ratio  construction  type and service description  The letter    T    as the  first character in the tire size means the tire is for  temporary use only     Tire Size    The following illustration shows an example of a typical  passenger car tire size         A  Passenger  P Metric  Tire  The United States  metric tire sizing system uses the letter    P    to designate  a passenger vehicle tire  The European metric tire  sizing system does not use the letter    P    to designate a  passenger vehicle tire      B  Tire Widt
261. t  means that service is required for your vehicle  Have  your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next  600 miles  1 000 km   It is possible that  if you are  driving under the best conditions  the engine oil   life system may not indicate that vehicle service is  necessary for over a year  However  your engine oil and  filter must be changed at least once a year and at   this time the system must be reset  Your GM  Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians  who will perform this work using genuine GM parts   and reset the system     6 4    If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally   you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles    5 000 km  since your last service  Remember to reset  the oil life system whenever the oil is changed  See  Engine Oil on page 5 13 for information on the Engine  Oil Life System and resetting the system     When the CHANGE OIL SOON light appears  certain  services  checks and inspections are required  Required  services are described in the following for      Maintenance I    and    Maintenance II     Generally  it is  recommended that your first service be Maintenance I   your second service be Maintenance II and that you  alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter   However  in some cases  Maintenance II may be  required more often     Maintenance I     Use Maintenance I if the light comes  on within ten months since vehicle was purchased or  Maintenance II was performed     Maintenance II    
262. t  on wheels        Put someone on it  Get it up to speed  Then stop the vehicle  The rider  doesn t stop     1 8       The person keeps going until stopped by something  In or the instrument panel     a real vehicle  it could be the windshield          or the safety belts     With safety belts  you slow down as the vehicle does   You get more time to stop  You stop over more distance   and your strongest bones take the forces  That   s why  safety belts make such good sense     Questions and Answers About  Safety Belts    Q  Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an  accident if I   m wearing a safety belt     A  You could be     whether you re wearing a safety  belt or not  But you can unbuckle a safety belt   even if you re upside down  And your chance  of being conscious during and after an accident  so  you can unbuckle and get out  is much greater if  you are belted     If my vehicle has air bags  why should   have to  wear Safety belts     Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in  most of them in the future  But they are  supplemental systems only  so they work with  safety belts     not instead of them  Every air bag  system ever offered for sale has required the use of  safety belts  Even if you re in a vehicle that has   air bags  you still have to buckle up to get the most  protection  That s true not only in frontal collisions   but especially in side and other collisions     If Pm a good driver  and   never drive far from  home  why should   wear safet
263. techniques could  save your life     Drunken Driving    Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  a national tragedy  It is the number one contributor   to the highway death toll  claiming thousands of victims  every year     Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a  vehicle       Judgment     Muscular Coordination   e Vision     Attentiveness   Police records show that almost half of all motor  vehicle related deaths involve alcohol  In most cases   these deaths are the result of someone who was  drinking and driving  In recent years  more than  16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been    associated with the use of alcohol  with more than  300 000 people injured     Many adults     by some estimates  nearly half the adult  population     choose never to drink alcohol  so they  never drive after drinking  For persons under 21    it is against the law in every U S  state to drink alcohol   There are good medical  psychological and  developmental reasons for these laws     The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety  problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then  drive  But what if people do  How much is    too much    if  someone plans to drive  It is a lot less than many might  think  Although it depends on each person and situation   here is some general information on the problem     The Blood Alcohol Concentration  BAC  of someone  who is drinking depends upon four things       The amount of alcohol consumed  
264. tenance services be  performed at the indicated intervals and the  maintenance be recorded      a  Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  hook up  binding  leaks  cracks  chafing  etc  Inspect  disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface  condition  Inspect other brake parts  including calipers   parking brake  etc      b  Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  steering system for damaged  loose or missing parts or  signs of wear  Inspect power steering lines and   hoses for proper hook up  binding  leaks  cracks   chafing  etc      c  Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if  they are cracked  swollen or deteriorated  Inspect   all pipes  fittings and clamps  replace with genuine GM  parts as needed  To help ensure proper operation  a  pressure test of the cooling system and pressure   cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air  conditioning condenser is recommended at least once  a year     6 8     d  Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking   Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged  or that streak or miss areas of the windshield      e  Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your  belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors and anchorages  are working properly  Look for any other loose or  damaged safety belt system parts  If you see anything  that might keep a safety belt system from doing its   job  have it repaired  Have any torn or frayed safety belts  replaced  Also look for any opened or broken air
265. th a clean  damp cloth to remove dirt  You  may have to do this more than once       Things like tar  asphalt and shoe polish will stain if    you do not get them off quickly  Use a clean cloth  and vinyl cleaner  See your dealer for this product     Cleaning Leather    Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or  saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth  Then  let  the leather dry naturally  Do not use heat to dry       For stubborn stains  use a leather cleaner       Never use oils  varnishes  solvent based or abrasive  cleaners  furniture polish or shoe polish on leather       Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned  immediately  If dirt is allowed to work into the finish   it can harm the leather     Cleaning the Top of the Instrument  Panel    Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces  of the instrument panel  Sprays containing silicones   or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the  windshield and even make it difficult to see through the  windshield under certain conditions     Cleaning Interior Plastic Components    Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth  or sponge  Commercial cleaners may affect the  surface finish     Cleaning Glass Surfaces    Glass should be cleaned often  GM Glass Cleaner or a  liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal  tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass  See  Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 85     Notice  If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning  glass surfaces 
266. the octane is less than 87  you  may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive  If this  occurs  use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher   as soon as possible  Otherwise  you might damage your  engine        Gasoline Specifications    It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications  which were developed by automobile manufacturers  around the world and contained in the World Wide Fuel  Charter which is available from the Alliance of  Automobile Manufacturers at www autoalliance org   Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide  improved driveability and emission control system  performance compared to other gasoline     In Canada  look for the     Auto Makers    Choice     label on the pump     Canada Only    California Fuel    If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission  Standards  see the underhood emission control label   it  is designed to operate on fuels that meet California  specifications  If this fuel is not available in states  adopting California emissions standards  your vehicle  will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal  specifications  but emission control system performance  may be affected  The malfunction indicator lamp may  turn on  see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 29    and your vehicle may fail a smog check test  If this  occurs  return to your authorized GM dealer for  diagnosis  If it is determined that the condition is caused  by the type of fuel used  repairs may not be covered   by your warranty     Addi
267. there seems to be no leak  with the engine on  check  to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running  If  the engine is overheating  the fan should be running    If it isn   t  your vehicle needs service     5 32       Notice  If you operate the engine without coolant  or fail to maintain the cooling system properly    you could damage the engine  The repairs would not  be covered by your warranty  Always follow the  maintenance schedule in this manual for  maintaining your cooling system  See Cooling  Sysiem on page 5 31 for more information     Notice  Using coolant other than DEX COOL   may  cause premature engine  heater core or radiator  corrosion  In addition  the engine coolant may  require changing sooner  at 30 000 miles  50 000 km   or 24 months  whichever occurs first  Any repairs  would not be covered by your warranty  Always use  DEX COOL    silicate free  coolant in your vehicle     How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  Surge Tank    If you haven t found a problem yet  check to see if  coolant is visible in the surge tank  If coolant is visible  but the coolant level isn   t at or above the COLD   FILL mark  add a 50 50 mixture of clean  drinkable  water and DEX COOL   coolant at the coolant surge  tank  but be sure the cooling system  including the  coolant surge tank pressure cap  is cool before you  do it     If no coolant is visible in the surge tank  add coolant as  follows     Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  system can blow out and burn y
268. though the shift lever may be in FIRST  1     the transmission does not select first gear until vehicle  speed is less that 35 mph  56 km h      Manual Transmission Operation    This is the shift pattern for  the six speed manual  transmission        Here is how to operate your transmission     FIRST  1   Press the clutch pedal and shift into  FIRST  1   Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as  you press the accelerator pedal     You can shift into FIRST  1  when you re going less  than 40 mph  64 km h   If you come to a complete stop  and it   s hard to shift into FIRST  1   put the shift   lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch  Press the  clutch pedal back down  Then shift into FIRST  1      SECOND  2   Press the clutch pedal as you let up on  the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND  2     Then  slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the  accelerator pedal     THIRD  3   FOURTH  4   FIFTH  5  and   SIXTH  6   Shift into THIRD  3   FOURTH  4   FIFTH  5   and SIXTH  6  the same way you do for SECOND  2    Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the  accelerator pedal     To stop  let up on the accelerator pedal and press the  brake pedal  Just before the vehicle stops  press   the clutch pedal and the brake pedal  and shift to  NEUTRAL     NEUTRAL  Use this position when you start or idle  your engine  Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it is  centered in the shift pattern  not in any gear     REVERSE  R   To back up  press down the clutch  pedal and
269. tives    To provide cleaner air  all gasolines in the United States  are now required to contain additives that will help  prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming   allowing your emission control system to work   properly  You should not have to add anything to your  fuel  However  some gasolines contain only the  minimum amount of additive required to meet U S   Environmental Protection Agency regulations     General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines  that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake  valves clean  If your vehicle experiences problems   due to dirty injectors or valves  try a different brand of  gasoline     Gasolines containing oxygenates  such as ethers and  ethanol  and reformulated gasolines may be available in  your area to contribute to clean air  General Motors  recommends that you use these gasolines  particularly if  they comply with the specifications described earlier     Notice  Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that  contains methanol  Do not use fuel containing  methanol  It can corrode metal parts in your fuel  system and also damage the plastic and rubber  parts  That damage would not be covered under  your warranty     Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive  called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese   tricarbonyl  MMT   ask the attendant where you buy  gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT  General Motors  does not recommend the use of such gasolin
270. trouble  To avoid this  everyone in    the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe  to do so  If you have breathing problems but  can   t get out of the vehicle after an air bag  inflates  then get fresh air by opening a  window or a door  If you experience breathing  problems following an air bag deployment  you  should seek medical attention     Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock  the doors  turn off the engine  turn off the fuel pump   and turn the interior lamps on when the air bags inflate   if battery power is available   You can operate these  features by switching the ignition OFF and then ON     In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air   bag  windshields are broken by vehicle deformation   Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the  right front passenger air bag          Air bags are designed to inflate only once  After an  air bag inflates  you will need some new parts for  your air bag system  If you do not get them  the air  bag system will not be there to help protect you  in another crash  A new system will include air bag  modules and possibly other parts  The service  manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace  other parts       Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and  diagnostic module  which records information  about the frontal air bag system  The module  records information about the readiness of the  system  when the system commands air bag  inflation and driver   s safety belt usage at  de
271. u is qualified to do so        The air bag system does not need regular maintenance     1 52    Restraint System Check    Checking Your Restraint Systems    Now and then  make sure the safety belt reminder light  and all your belts  buckles  latch plates  retractors   and anchorages are working properly  Look for any other  loose or damaged safety belt system parts  If you see  anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing  its job  have it repaired     Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a  crash  They can rip apart under impact forces  If a belt  is torn or frayed  get a new one right away     Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers  and  have them repaired or replaced   The air bag system  does not need regular maintenance      Replacing Restraint System Parts  After a Crash    A crash can damage the restraint systems in  your vehicle  A damaged restraint system may  not properly protect the person using it     resulting in serious injury or even death in a  crash  To help make sure your restraint  systems are working properly after a crash   have them inspected and any necessary  replacements made as soon as possible        If you have had a crash  do you need new belts or  LATCH system parts     After a very minor collision  nothing may be necessary     But if the belts were stretched  as they would be if  worn during a more severe crash  then you need  new parts     If the LATCH system was being used during a more  severe crash  you m
272. ue wrench to the  proper torque specification  See    Capacities  and Specifications    in the Index for wheel nut  torque specification        Notice  Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead  to brake pulsation and rotor damage  To avoid  expensive brake repairs  evenly tighten the wheel  nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  torque specification  See    Capacities and  Specifications    in the index for the wheel nut torque  specification     Notice  Wheel covers will not fit on your compact  spare  If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact  spare  you could damage the cover or the spare     Storing the Flat Tire and Tools    Storing a jack  a tire  or other equipment in the    passenger compartment of the vehicle could  cause injury  In a sudden stop or collision   loose equipment could strike someone  Store  all these in the proper place        Store the tools in the same way that they were removed     Place the flat tire in the temporary spare tire well in  the compartment under the trunk floor  Then place the  spare tire cover over the flat tire     Storing the Spare Tire and Tools    The compact spare is for temporary use only  Replace  the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon   as you can  See    Compact Spare Tire    following in this  section  See the storage instructions label to replace  your compact spare into your trunk properly     Compact Spare Tire    Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when  your vehicle was new  it 
273. um Load on the Tire  Load on an  individual tire due to curb weight  accessory weight   occupant weight and cargo weight     Vehicle Placard  A label permanently attached to a  vehicle showing original equipment tire size and   the recommended cold inflation pressure  See Loading  Your Vehicle on page 4 30     5 58    Inflation   Tire Pressure    Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate  effectively     Notice  Do not let anyone tell you that  underinflation or overinflation is all right  It is not  If  your tires do not have enough air  underinflation    you can get the following       Too much flexing     Too much heat     Tire overloading     Premature or irregular wear    Poor handling     Reduced fuel economy    If your tires have too much air  overinflation   you  can get the following       Unusual wear     Poor handling     Rough ride     Needless damage from road hazards    A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your  vehicle   s center pillar  below the driver   s door latch    This label lists your vehicle   s original equipment   tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures   The recommended cold tire inflation pressure  shown   on the label  is the minimum amount of air pressure  needed to support your vehicle   s maximum load carrying  capacity  For more information regarding how much  weight your vehicle can carry  see Loading Your Vehicle  on page 4 30     245 45ZR17 95W  235 40ZR18 91W    Front Tires  30 psi  210 kPa 
274. ument  panel on the driver s  side of the vehicle              2  Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on  the secondary hood release     3  After you have partially lifted the hood  gas struts  will automatically take over to lift and hold the  hood in the fully open position     Before closing the hood  be sure all the filler caps are  on properly  Then pull the hood down and push  firmly back into place     Engine Compartment Overview    When you open the hood on the engine  you ll see the following     Sn  SES  ed aa                         Up    on  ne j  A NY Gr  ala Va iN Fe fh UE sa A ils  3  y          Lo                      mmoOQO W    D      i    Engine Compartment Fuse Block  See    Engine  Compartment Fuse Block    under Fuses and Circuit  Breakers on page 5 87     Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir  See Windshield  Washer Fluid on page 5 37     Battery  See Battery on page 5 41   Engine Oil Dipstick  See Engine Oil on page 5 13   Engine Oil Fill Cap  See Engine Oil on page 5 13     Automatic Transmission Dipstick  If Equipped    See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 19     Power Steering Fluid Reservoir  See Power Steering  Fluid on page 5 36     Brake Fluid Reservoir  See Brakes on page 5 38   Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir  If Equipped   See  Hydraulic Clutch on page 5 24    Engine Coolant Reservoir  See Engine Coolant on  page 5 25    Engine Air Cleaner Filter  See Engine Air  Cleaner Filter on page 5 18     Engine Oil    If the Check Oil me
275. unctions  other information is stored only  in a crash or near crash event by computer systems  commonly called event data recorders  EDR      In a crash or near crash event  computer systems  such  as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module  SDM    in your vehicle may record information about the  condition of the vehicle and how it was operated  such  as engine speed  brake applications  throttle position   vehicle speed  safety belt usage  air bag readiness  air  bag performance data  and the severity of a collision   This information has been used to improve vehicle crash  performance and may be used to improve crash  performance of future vehicles and driving safety  Unlike  the data recorders on many airplanes  these on board  systems do not record sounds  such as conversation of  vehicle occupants     To read this information  special equipment is needed  and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required   GM will not access information about a crash event or  share it with others other than    with the consent of the vehicle owner or  if the  vehicle is leased  with the consent of the lessee     e in response to an official request of police or similar  government office      as part of GM   s defense of litigation through the  discovery process  or    e as required by law   In addition  once GM collects or receives data  GM may  e use the data for GM research needs       make it available for research where appropriate  confidentiality is to be maintained and need i
276. ut how  see Shifting   Into Park  P  on page 2 24     When you are ready to drive  move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  before you release the parking brake     If torque lock does occur  you may need to have another  vehicle push your vehicle uphill  This should take   some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the  transmission  so you can move the shift lever out   of PARK  P      2 25    Shifting Out of Park  P     Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock  control system  You must fully apply your regular brakes  before you can press the button on the shift lever to  shift from PARK  P  while the ignition is in ON    See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 18     If you cannot shift out of PARK  P   ease pressure   on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK  P   while keeping the brake pedal down  Release the shift  lever button  Then move the shift lever out of PARK  P    being sure to press the shift lever button     2 26    Shift Lock Release  If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot  shift out of PARK  P   try this    1  Turn the ignition to OFF and remove the key     2  Unclip the console cap and remove the screw  slightly to the right of the front center     3  Remove console cap to expose the yellow  release lever    4  Push the release lever forward and press the button  on the shift lever to move lever out of park    5  Replace the console cap    6  Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible     Parking Your Vehic
277. ut the features and  controls for your vehicle  In this manual  you will find  that pictures and words work together to explain things     Index    A good place to look for what you need is the Index in  back of the manual  It is an alphabetical list of what   is in the manual  and the page number where you will  find it       copyright General Motors Corporation 10 15 03  All Rights Reserved    Safety Warnings and Symbols    You will find a number of safety cautions in this book   We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you  about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore  the warning     These mean there is something that could hurt  you or other people        In the caution area  we tell you what the hazard is   Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the  hazard  Please read these cautions  If you don   t  you  or others could be hurt     You will also find a circle  with a slash through it in  this book  This safety  symbol means    Don t         Don   t do this    or  Don t let  this happen        Vehicle Damage Warnings  Also  in this book you will find these notices     Notice  These mean there is something that could  damage your vehicle     A notice will tell you about something that can damage  your vehicle  Many times  this damage would not be  covered by your warranty  and it could be costly  But the  notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the   damage     When you read other manuals  you might see  CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in diffe
278. utgrown child restraints and booster  seats and for smaller adults  the comfort guides may   be installed on the shoulder belts  Here is how to install  a comfort guide and use the safety belt     1  Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of  the seatback and the interior body to remove the  guide from its storage pocket     1 23       2  Slide the guide under and past the belt  The elastic  cord must be under the belt  Then  place the guide  over the belt  and insert the two edges of the  belt into the slots of the guide     1 24    3  Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat   The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  guide on top        4  Buckle  position and release the safety belt as  described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1 20   Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the  shoulder     To remove and store the comfort guides  squeeze the  belt edges together so that you can take them out of the  guides  Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the  side of the seatback     Safety Belt Pretensioners    Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners  You ll find  them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver  and right front passenger  They help the safety belts  reduce a person   s forward movement in a moderate to  severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits  something     Pretensioners work only once  If they activate in a  crash  you ll need to get new ones  and probably other  new parts for your safety belt system  S
279. vate a  one hour timer that will operate accessories such as  the radio  accessory power outlet  and windshield wipers  before turning off  These actions will reset the timer to  zero  Likewise  if an accessory such as the radio is  turned on at any time during the one hour period  the  timer is reset to zero and all accessories will continue to  operate for another hour  To enable accessory control  after the system has been reset  you must turn the  ignition on and then off again     Accessory Power Outlets    The vehicle has an  accessory power outlet  which can be used to plug  in electrical equipment  such as a cellular  telephone  compact disc  player  etc        The accessory power outlet is located inside the center  console  The power outlet is operational when the  ignition is turned to ON or ACCESSORY     Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet  When  not using the outlet  be sure to cover it with the  protective cap     Notice  Leaving electrical equipment on for  extended periods will drain the battery  Always turn  off electrical equipment when not in use and do  not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum  amperage rating     Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible  with the accessory power outlet and could result   in blown vehicle or adapter fuses  If you experience a  problem  see your dealer for additional information   on accessory power outlets     Notice  Adding any electrical equipment to your  vehicle may damage it or keep other compo
280. verseas     Customer Assistance              0 00100000  7 4  Owner Checks and Services               ccccceeeeeeeeees 6 9  Owner   s Information            c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11    Park  P    Shifting  IMO 5 eks inania enanta 2 24   Shifting QUT Of soen hi raa de ia 2 26  Parking   Brako ou er vis hans Leia bal 2 23   Over Things That Burn           ssseeeeeererereree 2 27   Your Vehicle Key Removal ccecce 2 26  PASSING  a iiicaeeddent E ces Attia naa ladda betasd 4 12  Plan Ahead When Possible icce 7 7  PAYING  ACD  a ccsecshcncctautengitontcasornesahuaegonnegeoe 3 45  Playing  the  Radio  sensisse aasien 3 43  Power   Accessory Outlets              c cceceeeeeeeeeeeee een eeaes 3 17   SOA EE ESSEN EE E A E ST 1 2   Steering  Fluid  52553 aa sleek Eben LEA DEG 5 36   Windows  arrene na aaa A dalene 2 11  Power Steering            u  sssseeevererereee eea een eeaeeaeeaes 4 9  Pretensioners  Safety Belt                 cceeeeeeeneee ees 1 25    Q    Questions and Answers About Safety Belts           1 10  Racing or Other Competitive Driving                    2 18  RADIO DISPLAY sn error 2 35  Radio SEE Eee 3 42  Care of Your CD Player         W u   s ssereeerereerernee 3 54  Care of Your CDS               eccececeee eee eeeeeeeeeees 3 54  Radio with Six Disc CD                  eceeeeeeee eee es 3 43  Setting the TIM ss reb eres 3 42  Theft Deterrent      W             sssseeeeererre rer rerneree 3 52  Understanding Reception     W    ssssseeeeeeeeeee 3 54  Rear 
281. vy   unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  negative       terminal if the vehicle with the dead  battery has one    Don   t connect positive     to negative       or you ll  get a short that would damage the battery and  maybe other parts  too  And don   t connect   the negative       cable to the negative       terminal  on the dead battery because this can cause sparks        5 44       Don   t let the other end touch anything until the next  step  The other end of the negative       cable   does not go to the dead battery  It goes to a heavy   unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  negative       terminal on the vehicle with the dead  battery     9  Connect the other end of the negative     cable at  least 18 inches  45 cm  away from the dead battery   but not near engine parts that move  The electrical  connection is just as good there  and the chance  of sparks getting back to the battery is much less     10  Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  the engine for a while     11  Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery  If  it won t start after a few tries  it probably needs  service     Replace any battery covers     Notice  If the jumper cables are removed in the  wrong order  electrical shorting may occur and  damage the vehicle  The repairs would not be  covered by your warranty  Remove the jumper  cables in the correct order  making sure that the  cables do not touch each other or other metal     5 45    To disconnect the jumper cab
282. when this position is selected  and the ignition is on  After reversing  make sure the  vehicle has fully stopped before selecting another gear  position  After selecting this position  pause for a  moment before accelerating to allow the transmission to  engage reverse gear     Notice  Shifting to REVERSE  R  while your vehicle  is moving forward could damage the transmission   The repairs would not be covered by your warranty   Shift to REVERSE  R  only after your vehicle is  stopped     To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow   ice or sand without damaging your transmission    see If You Are Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow on  page 4 28     NEUTRAL  N   In this position  your engine doesn   t  connect with the wheels  To restart when you   re already  moving  use NEUTRAL  N  only  Also  use   NEUTRAL  N  when your vehicle is being towed  This is  the out of gear position  You may then start a stalled  engine while the vehicle is still moving or stopped     Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is  running at high speed is dangerous  Unless    your foot is firmly on the brake pedal  your  vehicle could move very rapidly  You could  lose control and hit people or objects  Do not  shift into a drive gear while your engine is  running at high speed        Notice  Shifting out of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N   with the engine running at high speed may damage  the transmission  The repairs would not be   covered by your warranty  Be sure the engine is not  runni
283. x any  mechanical or electrical problems that may have  developed     Emissions Inspection and Maintenance  Programs    Some state provincial and local governments have or  may begin programs to inspect the emission control  equipment on your vehicle  Failure to pass this  inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle  registration     Here are some things you need to know to help your  vehicle pass an inspection     Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  engine light is on or not working properly     Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD   on board diagnostic  system determines that critical  emission control systems have not been completely  diagnosed by the system  The vehicle would be  considered not ready for inspection  This can happen if  you have recently replaced your battery or if your  battery has run down  The diagnostic system is  designed to evaluate critical emission control systems  during normal driving  This may take several days   of routine driving  If you have done this and your vehicle  still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD  system readiness  your GM dealer can prepare the  vehicle for inspection     3 31    Oil Pressure Light    If you have a low engine  oil pressure problem  a  Check Oil message in the  trip computer display  along with this symbol will  stay on after you start  your engine  or come on  when you are driving     This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough  oil  The engine 
284. xhaust system parts  starting a fire    Too little fluid could cause the transmission to  overheat  Be sure to get an accurate reading if you  check your transmission fluid     Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the  transmission fluid level if you have been driving in the  following conditions     e When outside temperatures are above 90  F  32  C     At high speed for quite a while     In heavy traffic     especially in hot weather     While pulling a trailer    5 20    To get the right reading  the fluid should be at  normal operating temperature  which is 180  F to 200  F   82  C to 93  C      Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles   24 km  when outside temperatures are above 50  F   10  C   If it   s colder than 50  F  10  C   drive the vehicle  in DRIVE  D  until the engine temperature gage  moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes     A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has  been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off   but this is used only as a reference  Let the engine   run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are  50  F  10  C  or more  If it   s colder than 50  F  10  C   you  may have to idle the engine longer  Should the fluid  level be low during this cold check  you must check the  fluid hot before adding fluid  Checking the fluid hot   will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level     Checking the Fluid Level  Prepare your vehicle as follows     Park your vehicle on a level place  Keep t
285. y  Several transportation options  are available when warranty repairs are required  This will  reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs     Plan Ahead When Possible    When your vehicle requires warranty service  you  should contact your dealer and request an appointment   By scheduling a service appointment and advising   your service consultant of your transportation needs   your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience     If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  department immediately  keep driving it until it can be  scheduled for service  unless  of course  the problem is  safety related  If it is  please call your dealership  let  them know this  and ask for instructions     If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle  off for service  you are urged to do so as early in  the work day as possible to allow for same day repair     Transportation Options    Warranty service can generally be completed while you  wait  However  if you are unable to wait Pontiac   helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several  transportation options  Depending on the circumstances   your dealer can offer you one of the following     Shuttle Service    Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle  service to get you to your destination with minimal  interruption of your daily schedule  This includes a one  way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to   10 miles from the dealership     Public Transportation or Fuel  Reimbursement    
286. y  do not give up  Keep trying to  steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of  less danger     4 13    Skidding    In a skid  a driver can lose control of the vehicle   Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  care suited to existing conditions  and by not     overdriving    those conditions  But skids are always  possible     The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle   s  three control systems  In the braking skid  your wheels  are not rolling  In the steering or cornering skid  too  much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to   slip and lose cornering force  And in the acceleration  skid  too much throttle causes the driving wheels   to spin     A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off  the accelerator pedal     Remember  Any traction control system helps avoid only  the acceleration skid  If your traction control system is  off  then an acceleration skid is also best handled   by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal     If your vehicle starts to slide  ease your foot off the  accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  the vehicle to go  If you start steering quickly enough   your vehicle may straighten out  Always be ready   for a second skid if it occurs     Of course  traction is reduced when water  snow  ice   gravel or other material is on the road  For safety    you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to  these conditions  It is important to slow down on slippery  surfaces because st
287. y  will be locked in when it is shut     Remote Trunk Release    This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside the  vehicle        Push the button in the glovebox to unlock the trunk   provided you are not traveling over 12 mph  20 km h  or  the alarm system is on  Then from the outside  lift up  the trunk  For added vehicle security  the glovebox  button is disabled when all the doors are locked with the  LOCK button on the key or through the door lock              There is also a secondary trunk release handle located  under the passenger s side rear seat head restraint   To access this handle  when the vehicle is not moving   lift the head restraint and pull the yellow ring towards  the front of the vehicle     Emergency Trunk Release Handle          Notice  Using the emergency trunk release handle  as a tie down or anchor point when securing   items in the trunk may damage it  Use the  emergency trunk release handle only to help you  open the trunk lid     There is a glow in the dark emergency trunk release  handle located inside the trunk on the trunk lid    This handle will glow following exposure to light  Pull the  release handle to open the trunk from the inside     2 10    Windows    Leaving children  helpless adults  or pets ina  vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous   They can be overcome by the extreme heat    and suffer permanent injuries or even death  from heat stroke  Never leave a child  a  helpless adult  or a pet alone in a vehicle   especial
288. y belts     You may be an excellent driver  but if you re in an  accident     even one that isn   t your fault     you and  your passengers can be hurt  Being a good   driver doesn   t protect you from things beyond your  control  such as bad drivers     Most accidents occur within 25 miles  40 km   of home  And the greatest number of serious  injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less  than 40 mph  65 km h      Safety belts are for everyone     How to Wear Safety Belts Properly    This part is only for people of adult size     Be aware that there are special things to know about  safety belts and children  And there are different   rules for smaller children and babies  If a child will be  riding in your vehicle  see Older Children on page 1 26  or Infants and Young Children on page 1 28  Follow  those rules for everyone   s protection     First  you ll want to know which restraint systems your  vehicle has     We ll start with the driver position     Driver Position  This part describes the driver s restraint system     Lap Shoulder Belt  The driver has a lap shoulder belt  Here is how to wear  it properly    1  Close and lock the door     2  Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight  To see  how  see    Seats    in the Index     4  Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks   Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure   If the belt is not long enough  see Safety Belt  Extender on page 1 25   Make sure the release button on the buckle is  positioned so
289. ymbol on the left  The symbol   will remain as long as the low traction situation exists     To limit wheel spin  especially in slippery road  conditions  you should always leave the TCS on   But you can turn the system off if you prefer     To turn the system off   press the T C button    On manual transmission  vehicles the button is  located on the driver   s side  of the center console    On automatic transmission  vehicles the button is  located on the passenger   s  side of the shift lever     T C    When you turn the system off  a Traction Ctrl Off  message is displayed on the trip computer  After  two seconds  the display goes back to the original  trip computer display with a small TRAC OFF icon  on the right     If the Traction Ctrl Off message does not display when  the button is pressed  or if it comes on during driving    a problem is indicated in the system and traction control  is no longer operational  You should contact your  dealer for service     Pressing the T C button again or the next time the  ignition is turned on  will turn the system back on   The Traction Ctrl On message is displayed on the trip  computer  After two seconds  the display goes back  to the original trip computer display     Steering    Power Steering    If you lose power steering assist because the engine  stops or the system is not functioning  you can steer but  it will take much more effort     Steering Tips  Driving on Curves  It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed  
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
GPS Receiver Module User's Guide  Practical Notes  地上デジタル対応テレビの再スキャン方法  Hard Surface Vacuum  Life Fitness TR95 User's Manual  Unravelling the mysteries of your hi-fi / home theatre  国土交通省の公共工事等における新技術活用システム 【NETIS】登録の  16 ポート LAN 電源 HUB 取扱説明書 (SK  高さ70   取扱説明書    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file